Brilliance CT 6-64, Big Bore, iCT & Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement PDF

Brilliance CT 6/10/16/
16P/40/64, Big Bore and

iCT - MX8000 Dual v.EXP
Patient Support Repair and
Replacement
Repair and Replacement Manual
4598 007 86121

Revision B
This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and confidential information of Philips Healthcare ("Philips") and may not be
reproduced, copied in whole or in part, adapted, modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the prior written permission of the Philips
Legal Department. Use of this document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips personnel and Philips customers
who have a current and valid license from Philips for use by the customer’s designated in-house service employee on equipment located at the
customer’s designated site. Use of this document by unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the
Philips Legal Department. This document must be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips’ first
written request.
This document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips Healthcare (“Philips”) personnel, Philips licensed
representatives and Philips customers who have purchased a valid service agreement for use by the customer’s designated in-house service
employee on equipment located at the customer’s designated site. Use of this document by unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. This
document must be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips’ first written request.
© 2015 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved. CSIP Level 1

Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement
Safety and Legal Information

To the User of This Manual
The user of this manual is directed to read and carefully review the instructions, warnings and cautions contained herein
prior to beginning installation or service activities. While you may have previously installed or serviced equipment similar
to that described in this manual, changes in design, manufacture or procedure may have occurred which significantly
affect the present installation or service.
Legal Manufacturer
Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc.
A Philips Healthcare Company
595 Miner Road
Cleveland, OH 44143
USA
Warranty Disclaimer
Philips provides this document without warranty of any kind, implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Limitation of Liability
Philips has taken care to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, Philips assumes no liability for errors or
omissions and reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein to improve reliability,
function, or design. Philips may make improvements or changes in the product(s) or program(s) described in this
document at any time.
Password Notice
The PASSWORD is the property of Philips Healthcare and is provided for the exclusive purpose of providing access to
selected service utilities which are described in this service manual as being associated with the password. Use of this
password for any purpose other than for the access to the selected services utilities is strictly prohibited.
4598 007 86121 Rev B CSIP Level 1 WARNING: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW. 2
Safety
!
WARNING: In addition to the warnings listed above, follow all safety guidelines as described in the
Safety Manual. Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury.
Installation and Environment

Except for installations requiring certification by the manufacturer, see that a radiation protection survey is made by a qualified expert
in accordance with NCRP 102, section 7, as revised. Perform a survey after every change in equipment, workload, or operating
conditions which might significantly increase the probability of persons receiving more than the maximum permissible dose
equivalent.
Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Mechanical-electrical Warning
!
WARNING: Before initiating a movement of the patient table or gantry, ensure that the area is free of
obstructions such as tools, boxes, chairs, and step stools. Physical injury or damage can
occur.
All of the moveable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated with care and routinely inspected in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations contained in the equipment manuals.
Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be permitted access to any internal parts. Live electrical terminals are deadly; be
sure line disconnects are opened and other appropriate precautions are taken before opening access doors, removing enclosure
panels, or attaching accessories.
Do not under any circumstances remove the flexible high tension cables from the x‐ray tube housing or high tension generator and/or
the access covers from the generator until the main and auxiliary power supplies have been disconnected. Failure to comply with the
above may result in serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.
Prior to any service and maintenance activities inside components:
• Switch off the system at the main power supply, and the uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
• Make sure that no other person can switch on power or switch off any safety measures, when installation, maintenance or service
work on the system is performed.
• Always use an ESD protection wrist strap when servicing any component in the system.
Electrical-grounding Instructions
The equipment must be grounded to an earth ground by a separate conductor. The neutral side of the line is not to be considered the
earth ground. On equipment provided with a line cord, the equipment must be connected to a properly grounded, three‐pin
receptacle. Do not use a three‐to‐two pin adapter.
Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Radiation Warning

X‐ray and Gamma‐rays are dangerous to both operator and others in the vicinity unless established safe exposure procedures are
strictly observed.
The useful and scattered beams can produce serious or fatal bodily injuries to any persons in the surrounding area if used by an
unskilled operator. Adequate precautions must always be taken to avoid exposure to the useful beam, as well as to leakage radiation
from within the source housing or to scattered radiation resulting from the passage of radiation through matter.
Those authorized to operate, participate in or supervise the operation of the equipment must be thoroughly familiar and comply
completely with the current established safe exposure factors and procedures described in publications, such as: Subchapter J of Title
21 of the Code of Federal Regulations, ʺDiagnostic X‐ray Systems and Their Major Componentsʺ, and the national council on radiation
protection (NCRP) no. 102, ʺMedical X‐ray And Gamma‐ray Protection For Energies Up To 10 Mev‐equipment Design and Useʺ.
Those responsible for planning of x‐ray and gamma‐ray equipment installations must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely
with NCRP no. 49, ʺStructural Shielding Design and Evaluation for Medical of X‐rays and Gamma‐rays of Energies Up to 10 Mevʺ.
Failure to observe these warnings may cause serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.
Symbol Descriptions
! Attention symbol Radiation warning symbol
Laser warning symbol Biohazard warning symbol
Magnetism warning symbol Projectile warning symbol
Electrical warning symbol Do not touch
Recycle Label
Dispose of in accordance with your country’s
requirements. This label indicates that there is
Crush warning symbol material in the system that you must separately
collect and recycle in accordance with the
requirements of the European Waste Electrical
Equipment (WEEE) Directive.
Revision History
ECO Revision Date Comments
12nc number changed. Previous version of document was 4535 670 87091
revision AG. Added a new section for Replacing the Sub‐frame Service Lock.
Updated the Patient Support Covers Removal / Replacement chapter for
E‐037778 A December 2014 clarity. Added Appendix A to address the release, engagement and testing of
the subframe quick release. Added Vertical Drive Ball Screw Bearing Retainer
Alignment procedure and Horizontal Drive Screw Replacement procedure.
Deleted 12nc for encoder belt kit.
Added instructions for vertical motor inverter module and AMC horizontal
E‐062075 B September 2015
motor controller replacement.
This document was prepared by CT/AMI Service Innovations.
For any additions, corrections, or suggestions, contact your next level of support.
Section 1 Safety Guidelines: ............................................................................. 19

1.1 General Precautions...................................................................................................19
1.1.1 Remote Services ..............................................................................................20
1.1.2 Explanation of Symbols.....................................................................................20
1.1.3 Servicing Electro-medical Systems and Equipment................................................21
1.1.4 General Visual Checks to Be Made Before Returning a System To Service ................22
1.2 Personal Protection Measures (Occupational Safety) .......................................................23
1.2.1 Mandatory Reporting ........................................................................................23
1.2.2 Working on Parts Supplied With Electrical Power...................................................23
1.2.3 Radiation Protection .........................................................................................24
1.2.4 Handling Heavy Loads ......................................................................................25
1.2.5 Handling Hazardous Substances.........................................................................25
1.3 Service Precautions ...................................................................................................26
1.4 Attaching Fasteners, Screws, Bolts, and Nuts ................................................................27
1.4.1 Torque Specifications for Couch Components .......................................................27
1.4.2 Using Loctite ...................................................................................................30
1.5 System Specific Safety Precautions ..............................................................................31
1.5.1 Laser Lights on the System ...............................................................................32
1.6 ESD—Anti-Static Field Service Kit ................................................................................33
1.6.1 Anti-Static Discharge (ESD)...............................................................................33
1.6.2 Anti-static Discharge (ESD) Procedure ................................................................35
Section 2 Brilliance 6-64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up: 36
2.1 System Shutdown and Power Down .............................................................................36
2.1.1 Gantry Power Down (Except for the Host and CIRS)..............................................37
2.1.2 Removing Table Power......................................................................................40
2.2 System Power Up ......................................................................................................41
2.2.1 CIRS and System Startup..................................................................................44
Section 3 Placing the Brilliance 6-64 and Big Bore Patient Support into the Service Mode :
45
Section 4 Brilliance iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up: ................................... 48

4.1 General Information ..................................................................................................48
4.2 Brilliance iCT System Power Down/Power Up .................................................................49
4.2.1 Complete iCT System Shutdown and Power Down ................................................49
4.2.2 Complete iCT Gantry Power Down (Except for the Host and CIRS) ..........................51
4.2.3 Powering Down the iCT Patient Support Only .......................................................53
4.3 Brilliance iCT System Power Up ...................................................................................55
Section 5 Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the Service Mode: ........ 56
Section 6 Replacing Sub-frame Service Lock: .................................................... 61

6.1 Removing the Subframe Rear Cover, ESD Cover and RH Subframe Cover .........................62
6.2 Removing the Sub-frame Service Lock .........................................................................64
6.3 Installing the Sub-frame Service Lock ..........................................................................67
6.4 Subframe Cover Installation........................................................................................69
Section 7 Placing Lower Covers into the Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety
Support: .......................................................................................................... 70
7.1 Placing the Covers into the Service Position ..................................................................70
7.2 Installing the Vertical Safety Support ...........................................................................80
7.3 Removing the Vertical Safety Support ..........................................................................83
7.4 Taking Patient Support Covers out of Service Position ....................................................85
7.5 Servicing the Patient Support when it Cannot be Driven Vertically ....................................87
Section 8 1Patient Support Covers Removal / Replacement: .............................. 92

8.1 Subframe Covers Removal and Replacement .................................................................93
8.1.1 Brilliance Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal ..........................................93
8.1.2 Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation .................................................. 107
8.1.3 Removing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers ................................................ 120
8.1.4 Installing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers ................................................. 125
8.1.5 Upper Subframe Cover Removal....................................................................... 128
8.1.6 Upper Subframe Cover Installation ................................................................... 129
8.2 Patient Support Lower Telescoping Covers Removal / Replacement ................................ 129
8.2.1 Removing the Lower Telescoping Covers ........................................................... 129
8.2.2 Installing the Lower Telescoping Covers ............................................................ 134
Section 9 Power Panel Removal / Replacement Procedure : ............................... 135

9.1 Removal................................................................................................................. 135
9.2 Installation ............................................................................................................. 138
Section 10 Power Supply Removal / Replacement Procedure: ........................... 139

10.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 139
10.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 140
Section 11 Inverter Panel Removal / Replacement Procedure : .......................... 141

11.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 141
11.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 148
Section 12 Vertical Motor Inverter Module Replacement: .................................. 156

12.0.1 Tools Required:............................................................................................ 156
12.1 Removing the Inverter ........................................................................................... 157
12.2 Installing the Inverter ............................................................................................ 163
Section 13 Couch Control Board Removal / Replacement Procedure : ................. 168

13.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 168
13.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 169
Section 14 Couch CPM Board Removal / Replacement Procedure : ...................... 171

14.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 171
14.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 174
Section 15 ACS Controller Removal / Replacement Procedure: .......................... 176

15.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 176
15.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 179
Section 16 AMC Horizontal Motor Controller Replacement Procedure: ................ 180

16.1 Removing the Controller ......................................................................................... 181
16.2 Installing the Controller .......................................................................................... 183
Section 17 Footswitch Tape Switches Removal / Replacement Procedure : ......... 185

17.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 185
17.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 187
Section 18 Vertical Drive Motor & Encoder Belt Removal/Replacement: ............. 189
18.1 Removing the Vertical Drive Motor ........................................................................... 189
18.2 Vertical Drive Motor and Encoder Belt Installation ...................................................... 198
18.2.1 Installing Spare Encoder Belts........................................................................ 198
18.3 Installing the Vertical Drive Motor ............................................................................ 199

18.3.1 Installing the Encoder Belt............................................................................. 206
Section 19 Vertical Brake Removal / Replacement: ........................................... 210

19.1 Brake Replacement Scenarios.................................................................................. 210
19.1.1 Scenario 1: ................................................................................................. 211
19.1.2 Scenario 2: ................................................................................................. 213
19.2 Removing a Vertical Brake ...................................................................................... 214
19.2.1 Removing a P/N 4535 664 98911 Brake .......................................................... 214
19.2.2 Removing a Warner ERD5 Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 ........................... 219
19.3 Installing a Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)..... 225
Section 20 Vertical Motion Encoder Belt Removal / Replacement Procedure : ..... 232
Section 21 Vertical Encoder Assembly Removal / Replacement Procedure : ........ 233

21.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 233
21.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 235
Section 22 Vertical Transducer Removal / Replacement Procedure : ................... 240

22.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 240
22.1.1 Installation .................................................................................................. 242
Section 23 Vertical Monitor Board Removal / Replacement Procedure: .............. 244

23.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 244
23.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 245
Section 24 Vertical Up/Down Limit Switches Removal / Replacement Procedure : 247

24.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 247
24.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 248
Section 25 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement - Standard Support: .............. 250
25.1.1 Removing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew............................................................. 258
25.2 Installing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew ....................................................................... 264
Section 26 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement -

Extended Support: .......................................................................................... 285
26.2 Removing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew ...................................................................... 293
26.3 Installing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew ....................................................................... 300
26.4 Notes on the Operation of the Vertical Safety Switches ............................................... 318
Section 27 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Bearing Retainer

Alignment Check: ............................................................................................ 328
27.1 Preparation for Checking Alignment.......................................................................... 329
27.2 Installing Alignment Tool and Checking Alignment...................................................... 330
27.3 Alignment Correction ............................................................................................. 333
27.4 Removing Alignment Tool ....................................................................................... 337
27.5 Final Steps ........................................................................................................... 338
Section 28 Standard Support Horizontal Drive Motor Replacement Procedure : ... 339
28.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 339
28.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 342
Section 29 Bariatric & Extended Horizontal Drive Motor Removal / Replacement: 344
29.1 Horizontal Drive Motor Removal............................................................................... 344
29.2 Horizontal Drive Motor Installation ........................................................................... 354
Section 30 Standard Horizontal Drive Belt Removal / Replacement Procedure : .. 356

30.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 356
30.1.1 Installation .................................................................................................. 359
Section 31 Bariatric & Extended Horizontal Drive Belt Replacement Procedure : . 361
31.1 Belt Removal ........................................................................................................ 361
31.1.1 Installation .................................................................................................. 366
Section 32 Standard Horizontal Brake Replacement Procedure : ......................... 367

32.1 Standard Horizontal Brake Removal ......................................................................... 368
32.2 Standard Horizontal Brake Installation...................................................................... 373
Section 33 Bariatric & Extended Support Horizontal Brake Replacement: ........... 377
33.1 Brake Removal ...................................................................................................... 377
33.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 381
Section 34 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement Procedure : ............... 382

34.1 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Removal ................................................................ 382
34.2 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Installation ............................................................. 387
Section 35 Bariatric & Extended Support Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement: . 388
35.1 Belt Removal ........................................................................................................ 389

35.2 Installing the Horizontal Clutch ................................................................................ 393
Section 36 Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder & Coupling Replacement: 395
36.1 Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder and Encoder Removal ........................... 396
36.2 Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder and Coupling Installation ....................... 400
36.3 Checking and Adjusting the Encoder Coupling Alignment............................................. 405
36.3.1 Checking The Absolute Encoder Coupling Alignment .......................................... 405
36.3.2 Aligning the Encoder Coupling ........................................................................ 406
36.4 Returning the System to Operation .......................................................................... 414
Section 37 Std Horizontal Relative Position Encoder Replacement: .................... 415

37.1 Standard Horizontal Relative Position Encoder Removal .............................................. 417
37.2 Standard Horizontal Relative Position Encoder Installation ........................................... 420
Section 38 Bariatric Absolute & Relative Position Encoders Replacement: .......... 421
38.1 Encoder Removal................................................................................................... 422
38.1.1 Encoder Installation ...................................................................................... 429
Section 39 Extended Support Absolute & Relative Position Encoders

Removal/Replacement: ................................................................................... 433
39.1 Removing the Encoders .......................................................................................... 434
39.2 Installing the Encoders ........................................................................................... 441
39.2.1 Installing the Relative Position Encoder ........................................................... 441
39.2.2 Installing the Absolute Position Encoder .......................................................... 444
Section 40 Standard Horizontal Drive Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure: ... 448
40.1 Drive Nut Removal................................................................................................. 450

40.2 Drive Nut Installation ............................................................................................. 456
Section 41 Standard Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure: 465

41.1 Drive Screw Removal ............................................................................................. 465
41.1.1 Subframe Cover Removal .............................................................................. 468
41.1.2 Drive Screw Removal .................................................................................... 470
41.2 Drive Screw Installation.......................................................................................... 476
Section 42 Bariatric Horizontal Drive Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure: ... 478
42.1.1 Belt Removal ............................................................................................... 480
42.1.2 Brake and Clutch Removal ............................................................................. 483
42.2.1 Installing the Clutch and Brake ...................................................................... 499
Section 43 Bariatric Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure : 506

43.1.1 Belt Removal ............................................................................................... 507
43.1.3 Encoder Removal ......................................................................................... 512
43.2.1 Encoder Installation ...................................................................................... 525
Section 44 Extended Support Horizontal Drive Nut Replacement Procedure : ...... 529

44.1.1 Belt Removal ............................................................................................... 531
Section 45 Extended Support Horizontal Drive Screw Replacement Procedure : .. 557

45.1.1 Belt Removal ............................................................................................... 558
45.1.3 Encoder Removal ......................................................................................... 564
45.3 Installing the Encoders ........................................................................................... 593
45.3.1 Installing the Absolute Position Encoder .......................................................... 595
Section 46 Horizontal Bearing Removal / Replacement Procedure: .................... 604

46.0.1 Removal ..................................................................................................... 604
46.0.2 Installation .................................................................................................. 608
Section 47 Top Horizontal Force Adjustment Procedure: ................................... 613

47.1 Drive Screw Adjustment ......................................................................................... 613
47.2 J-Bracket Adjustment ............................................................................................. 618
47.2.1 Returning the System to Operation ................................................................. 621
Section 48 Top Bearing Block Removal / Replacement Procedure: ..................... 622

48.1 Preparation for Bearing Block Replacement ............................................................... 623
48.2 Bearing Block Removal ........................................................................................... 632

48.3 Bearing Block Replacement ..................................................................................... 634
48.4 Restoring the System to Operation........................................................................... 637
Section 49 Bariatric Gas Spring Removal / Replacement Procedure : .................. 638
Section 50 Standard Brilliance Patient Support Carbon Top Replacement: .......... 644
50.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 644
50.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 647
Section 51 Extended Patient Support Carbon Top Replacement Procedure : ........ 652
51.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 652
51.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 657
Section 52 Dual-v.EXP Carbon Top Replacement: .............................................. 661

52.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 661
52.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 666
Section 53 Horizontal In/Out Limit Switches Removal / Replacement Procedure: 672

53.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 672
53.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 673
Section 54 Brilliance Horizontal Tape Switches Replacement: ........................... 674

54.1 Removal............................................................................................................... 674
54.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 676
Section 55 Multi-Function Footswitch & Parts Replacement:.............................. 678
55.1 Removing the Footswitch ........................................................................................ 681

55.1.1 Removing the Footpedals .............................................................................. 681
55.2 Footswitch Assembly and Installation ....................................................................... 688
Section 56 Patient Monitoring Information System Components Replacement: ... 695

56.1 System Preparation ............................................................................................... 695
56.2 USB Extender Module Replacement .......................................................................... 696
56.2.1 Removing the USB Extender Module ............................................................... 696
56.2.2 Installing the USB Extender Module ................................................................ 699
56.3 Tapeswitch Transition Board Replacement................................................................. 699
56.3.1 Removing the Tapeswitch Transition Board ...................................................... 699
56.3.2 Installing the Tapeswitch Transition Board ....................................................... 704
Section 57 Checking Horizontal Drive Belt Tension: .......................................... 707

57.1 Meter Setup .......................................................................................................... 707
57.2 Checking the Belt Tension....................................................................................... 710
Section 58 Replacement of an Entire Patient Support: ...................................... 713
Appendix A Patient Support Subframe Quick Release: ....................................... 714

A.1 Releasing the Patient Support Subframe Quick Release ................................................ 714
A.2 Engaging the Patient Support Subframe Quick Release ................................................. 715
A.3 Testing Patient Support Subframe Quick Release ......................................................... 717
Section 1
Section 1 Safety Guidelines
The safety precautions and procedures described in this section ensures the safety of all personnel during
servicing and operation of the Patient Support. For more safety information concerning Brilliance 6‐64 CT
systems, refer to the Brilliance 6‐64 CT Safety Guidelines Manual, p/n 4535 670 63771. For Big Bore
systems, refer to Brilliance CT Big Bore Safety Guidelines Manual, p/n 4535 673 42951. For more safety
information concerning Brilliance iCT Systems, refer to the iCT Safety Guidelines Manual p/n 4535 674
61491.
!
WARNING: READ ALL THIS SAFETY INFORMATION VERY CAREFULLY. THIS KNOWLEDGE COULD SAVE
LIVES.
1.1 General Precautions

This product was designed and manufactured to ensure maximum safety of operation and service. It
should be installed, maintained, and serviced in strict compliance with the safety instructions contained
herein.
• No changes to, additions to, or removal of any system accessories are permitted without the prior
written approval of a local service manager.
• Do not leave problems unsolved that may affect the safety of the product. In case of doubt concerning
the system's safe operation, call the service manager for further instruction.
• Do not allow unauthorized personnel access to the system. Only properly trained and fully qualified
personnel are authorized to install and operate this equipment.
• Leave the site clean and orderly.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 1 Safety Guidelines
1.1.1 Remote Services
!
CAUTION: All HIPAA and other privacy regulations must be adhered to when using any remote service
tools.
Customers must be notified before use of any remote service tools that affect the
performance of the system. All remote users must be train prior to the use of this tool. When
using this utility, be careful of others signing on to your system while performing service or
while remote session is in progress.
1.1.2 Explanation of Symbols

Symbols used in the technical documents have the following meanings:
Table 1-1: Symbol Explanation
Activities on or near parts that are supplied with voltages greater that 50 V.
Activities with radiation switched ON.
Warning of an activity that could cause personnel injury.
Cautionary note about an activity that could result in equipment damage.
Work with Lasers
Activities with biohazard
1.1.3 Servicing Electro-medical Systems and Equipment

All work must be carried out in accordance with the technical documentation. Make sure (with a second
verification) that all mechanical connections are connected properly before starting the equipment after
the installation, or assembly replacement.
Make sure (with a second verification) that all protective ground wires provided by the manufacturer are
connected properly before starting the equipment after installation, or assembly replacement. This
applies, for example, to all metallic covers which may develop a dangerous contact voltage in case of a
fault. They must always be connected to the protective ground wire. To ensure this, the connection
between these covers and the protective ground wire must be made with screws and contact washer or
via the protective ground wires provided.

Means “Terminal for connection of equipment protective ground wire.”
The protective ground wires must be connected between the system components and the power supply as
shown in the system wiring diagram.
In the interest of protection for all personnel, the protective ground wires must be installed prior to first
switching on the product/system, as well as after completing all work, before turnover to the customer, in
accordance with the product documentation.
Perform the Electrical Line Inspection procedure before turning the system ON (see Electrical Line
Inspection).
1.1.4 General Visual Checks to Be Made Before Returning a

System To Service
• All fasteners should have the specified Loctite applied.
• Check all cable connectors for proper retention.
• Check all wire terminations for proper retention.
• Check entire system for missing or broken hardware.
• Check the inside and outside of the system for any loose debris.
• Check that all component fasteners on the Gantry Rotor are properly torqued.
• Check that all safety locking devices are removed.
1.2 Personal Protection Measures (Occupational

Safety)
The legally relevant and internal regulations and specifications concerning protection of labor and
accident prevention must be observed, primarily in the interest of the persons performing the work. The
notes below are given as additional information.
1.2.1 Mandatory Reporting

The supervisor in charge must be notified at once in the event of an accident or if there are any hazards
which may cause an accident.
!
CAUTION: When performing work within the danger area of products, any involuntary unit movements
must be prevented by actuating the service switch or the EMERGENCY STOP button
1.2.2 Working on Parts Supplied With Electrical Power

No work must be performed on current‐carrying parts (>50 V).
The system must be de‐energized by means of the (EPO) EMERGENCY POWER OFF switch on the PDU.
This prohibition does not apply for measuring and adjustment procedures. Be careful when performing
these procedures. Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the respective
procedure.
Test and adjustment points must be accessible without any risk of injury for the personnel. If this is not
possible, switch OFF the system.
If voltage must be applied during an operation, e.g., to perform unit movements, take every precaution
especially when working with moving and rotating parts. De‐energize the unit immediately afterwards.
1.2.3 Radiation Protection

Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation exposure if handled incorrectly. When radiation is applied, the
required protective measures must be complied with in every instance.
Laser Radiation
General Safety Precautions

• Laser products may not be operated without the appropriate housing.
• Only instructed co-workers are allowed to handle lasers. When working with lasers, observe all legal
and product specific regulations (T1 242).
• Do not look directly into the laser beam or at its reflection on smooth, mirror-like surfaces.
• Non-compliance with legal regulations can lead to bodily injury due to the hazardous effects of the laser
beam.
• Avoid eye exposure to direct reflections of the laser from any mirror-like reflective surfaces like
waveguides or plated metal.
WARNING: Class 3B Invisible laser radiation is present when the rear cover of newer Brilliance 64
gantries is removed and the interlock is defeated. Newer Brilliance 64 gantries use Class 3B
Invisible Lasers for the Optical Data Path inside the rear gantry cover. Wear laser safety
glasses, P/N 453567543401 whenever working at the rear of the gantry with the gantry rear
cover removed and the power on. Failure to comply may cause eye injury.
1.2.4 Handling Heavy Loads

Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g., safety boots and gloves, care must be taken that
heavy loads are correctly lifted or carried to avoid any physical injury (e.g., injuring the spine).
The relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several persons.
!
CAUTION: When moving or lifting equipment, be careful of sharp edges and metal exposed surface with
edges. Injury to service personnel can occur from scraps, pinching, cuts or wounds, if not
handled carefully and correctly.
1.2.5 Handling Hazardous Substances

Hazardous substance is the designation for materials which can ignite, explode, which are toxic, injurious
to health, corrosive or irritating or are hazardous to the environment.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them are identified
clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the hazardous substances.
Before they are handled, these instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be
complied with when performing work to avoid health environmental risks.
In addition, all relevant instructions in the documentation must be complied with.
Blood-borne Pathogens
WARNING: There is danger of becoming infected from blood-borne pathogens. Follow key market
policies and procedures for decontamination and protection against exposure to blood-borne
pathogens when handling parts that may have come into contact with substance from
patients. Exposure to blood borne pathogens may result in serious personnel injury or
death.
1.3 Service Precautions

Safety precautions must be taken before servicing the system. It is the responsibility of the service
engineer to ensure that these precautions are taken to avoid any hazard.
There are five different kinds of potential hazards when servicing the system as follows:
• Mechanical hazards
• Electrical hazards
• Radiation hazards
• Thermal hazards
• Environmental hazards
1.4 Attaching Fasteners, Screws, Bolts, and Nuts

1.4.1 Torque Specifications for Couch Components
Table 1‐2 on page 28 and Table 1‐3 on page 29 show nominal tightening torque values for bolts/screws
that are based on a torque coefficient of 0.15 (zinc plated screws with Loctite) and 75% proof load. Table 1‐
2 on page 28 is for metric size fasteners and Table 1‐3 on page 29 is for US sizes. Torque value for nylon
locking nuts are based on usage with PEM studs only.
Table 1-2: Metric Torque Specifications
Socket Head Cap

Nylon Locking
XCLS-0380002 Flat Head Socket Socket Head
Pan Head Nuts
Bolt/Screw (Class 8.8 Steel) Cap Shoulder
XCLS-0380010 XCLS-0380019
Size Hex Head XCLS-0380009 XCLS-0380018
(Class 4.8 Steel) (Class 8 Steel, for
XCLS-038001 (Class 10.9 Steel) (Class 12.9 Steel)
use on PEM studs)
(Class8.8 Steel)
ft-lbs ft-lbs ft-lbs ft-lbs

N-m N-m N-m N-m ft-lbs N-m
(in-lbs) (in-lbs) (in-lbs) (in-lbs)
M2 x 0.4 0.2 (1.7) - 0.2 (1.7) - - - -
M2.5 x 0.45 0.6 (5.3) - 0.3 (2.6) - - - -
M3 x 0.5 1.1 (9.7) 1 (8.8) 0.5 (4.4) - - 0.7 (6.2)
M4 x 0.7 2 (17) 2 (17.7) 1 (8.8) - - 2 (17.7)
M5 x 0.8 4 2.9 5 3.6 (44.2) 2.5 (22) 6 4.4 3 (26.5)
M6 x 1 8 5.9 9 6.6 (79.6) 4 (35) 11 8.1 6 4.4
M8 x 1.25 19 14 - - - - 25 18.4 14 10.3
M10 x 1.5 37 27 - - - - 50 36.9 36 26.5
M12 x 1.75 66 49 - - - - - - - -
M16 x 2 164 120 - - - - - - - -
M20 x 2.5 330 243 - - - - - - - -
M24 x 3 572 422 - - - - - - - -

Table 1-3: US Torque Specifications
Pan Head
S614 Series
(18-8 Stainless Steel)
Hex Head Flat Head, Socket Head Cap
Hex Head
Bolt/Screw S637A Series S615 Series S617-71 through -163
S637 Series
Size (Grade 5 Carbon (18-8 Stainless Steel) Series
(Grade 8 Alloy Steel)
Steel) Socket Head Cap (Alloy Steel)
S617-1 through -70
Series
(18-8 Stainless Steel)
ft-lb ft-lb
N-m N-m (in-lb) N-m ft-lb N-m
(in-lb) (in-lb)
#4-40 - - - - (3) 0.3 -
#6-32 - - - - (6) 0.6 -
#8-32 - - - - (10) 1.1 -
#10-32 - - - - (15) 1.7 -
6 9
1/4-20 8.1 12.2 (35) 3.9 11 15
(76) (111)
19
5/16-18 13 (150) 17.6 25.7 - - 22 29
(232)
23 34
3/8-16 31.2 46 - - 39 52
(275) (405)
1/2-13 56 76 84 114 - - 94 127
5/8-11 112 152 167 226 - - 179 242
1.4.2 Using Loctite

All screws and nuts must be secured with Loctite, except safety screws and safety nuts, which are secured
in place without Loctite.
The following two tightness classes are used:
• Loctite #222, lightly tightened and easily loosened is for all screws up to type M3, as well as all slotted
screws and Phillips head screws.
• Loctite #242, moderately tightened, (can still be loosened), is for all screws not listed under Loctite
#222.
• Loctite #425 must be used on fasteners in contact with plastic components since #242 can cause
cracking.
All parts that come into contact with Loctite must be clean and free of grease.
Apply a few drops of Loctite to the screw or to the first few threads of nut threading before inserting and
turning the screw or nut in place, so that Loctite fills the threading when the screw or nut is completely
secured.
Since Loctite remains fluid on contact with air over a long time, any excess can easily be wiped away later.
Note: Loctite hardens slowly upon contact with air; however, it also hardens in the absence of air. Do not use Loctite that is
older than the expiration date posted on the container
Note: On contact with metals, Loctite hardens only through catalyzation. Salt crystals form, which cause no damage and

are non‐corrosive.
Protective Measures
Loctite is non‐toxic. However, prolonged contact with the skin can cause irritations to the skin. Wounds
should be protected, since the healing process is slowed by contact with Loctite. If Loctite splashes into
the eye, rinse immediately with tap water or boric acid solution. Where contact with the skin cannot be
avoided, we recommend the use of paper tissues to wipe away the Loctite. After applying Loctite, wash
hands with soap and water. Do not use a cleaning solution to clean your hands.
Storage
Loctite can be stored for at least a year at room temperature.
!
CAUTION: Always check the expiration date on the Loctite container. Close the bottle when not in use.
1.5 System Specific Safety Precautions

Please keep the following in mind at all times:
•The system has red STOP buttons (Emergency Stop) that halt all Gantry and Patient Table motion,
as well as X-Ray generation, except for the Rotor. The rotor takes time to stop (up to 20 seconds).
Note: Even if the rotor is not spinning the main drive contactor remains closed up to 30 seconds after Estop opens.
• Emergency Stop are on the Gantry’s front cover, two on each side. Two are accessible only when
the front cover is open — these are open primarily for service personnel).
• On the Gantry’s rear cover, one Emergency Stop on each side.
• One button is on the Scan Control Box connected to the Operating Console.
• One button is on the Gantry left column on the Service Panel.
WARNING: Pressing these STOP buttons does not disconnect the power supply to the system.
1.5.1 Laser Lights on the System
WARNING: Do not look directly into the lasers (beam) path or its reflection on smooth, mirror-like
surfaces.
Non-compliance with legal regulations can lead to bodily injury due to the hazardous effects
of the laser beam.
WARNING: Class 3B Invisible laser radiation is present when the rear cover of newer Brilliance 64
gantries is removed and the interlock is defeated. Newer Brilliance 64 gantries use Class 3B
Invisible Lasers for the Optical Data Path inside the rear gantry cover. Wear laser safety
glasses, P/N 453567543401 whenever working at the rear of the gantry with the gantry rear
cover removed and the power on. Failure to comply may cause eye injury.
Safety When Working with Marker Lasers
WARNING: Do not leave the site before verifying the correct alignment of the laser light markers.
The system is equipped with a number of laser light positioning markers.
• Do not turn them ON if not necessary.
• Do not stare directly into the laser because of possible eye damage.
1.6 ESD—Anti-Static Field Service Kit

This section describes the use of the ESD—Anti‐Static Field Service Kit with the systems.
The integrated circuits and PC boards, which are equipped with electronic modules, require special
careful handling because of their electrostatic sensitive structures and their extremely high input
impedances.
1.6.1 Anti-Static Discharge (ESD)

Some system components contain electrostatic‐sensitive parts. Static‐sensitive components are supplied
in anti‐static bags that protect against dust and prevent electrostatic discharge.
KEEP STATIC SENSITIVE COMPONENTS IN THE ANTI-STATIC BAGS UNTIL THEY ARE REQUIRED.
!
CAUTION: Always use anti-static wristbands when touching electrical components or devices.
Purpose
This field service kit is designed to connect a field service engineer and the static-dissipative work mat to
the same ground point. The wrist strap and the dissipative mat drain any static charges from the body and
from any conductive objects placed on the mat, and prevent the generation of any new static charges. To
function properly they must be grounded properly using the alligator clip wire connection.
Tools
• Standard FSE tool kit
• Anti-static kit
• Anti-static Smock
Parts
Figure 1-1: Anti‐static Service Kit Parts

Anti‐Static Field Service Kit
(see Figure on page 34)
contains the following:
Work Mat
• Static-dissipative work mat,
with pockets for storing kit
components Wrist
• Ground cord assembly Strap
• Coiled cord
• Black cord
• Black snap
• Banana Plug
Coiled Cord
• Alligator clip Alligator
Clip
• Adjustable wrist strap
Banana
Plug
Black
Cord
Black Snap
1.6.2 Anti-static Discharge (ESD) Procedure

1. Unfold the work mat on the couch or intended work surface and remove the kit contents from the mat
pockets.
2. Snap the ground cord assembly to the work mat by means of the large black snap.
3. Slip on the elastic wrist strap. Adjust so that the wrist strap fits snugly, yet comfortably.
4. Connect the coiled cord of the ground cord assembly to the wrist strap by means of the small plastic
snap.
5. Connect the ESD alligator clip to a non‐painted grounded metal part.
6. Connect the black cord of the ground cord assembly to the alligator clip.
You are now static‐protected, and can safely handle static‐sensitive boards and components. Set each part
on the grounded mat only.
Transport replacement PC boards in static‐shielding bags or containers. Place any faulty boards removed
from the equipment in static‐shielding packaging so that additional damage is not incurred during
shipment to the repair depot.
Periodically check the conductivity of the anti‐static wrist strap cord and the mat connecting cord by
measuring the resistance end to end using the standard philips FSE service multimeter. The resistance
should be around 1 Megohm. Replace the cord if its resistance is considerably higher than that.
!
CAUTION: The grounding procedures detailed above effectively remove static from conductive objects
like the human body or metal parts. However, non-conductive objects (such as synthetic
clothing, plastic coffee cups, cigarette packs, vinyl work order envelopes, or common
plastics) can also carry large amounts of static charge, and the charges on nonconductors
such as these cannot be removed by grounding. Therefore, you must take care to keep all
such nonconductors as far from the work area and sensitive equipment as possible.
Section 2
Section 2 Brilliance 6-64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power
Down/Power Up
2.1 System Shutdown and Power Down
!
CAUTION: ALWAYS WAIT AT LEAST 30 SECONDS AFTER THE SYSTEM IS TURNED OFF BEFORE
TURNING IT BACK ON. TURNING THE SYSTEM SUPPLY SWITCH OFF AND ON TOO QUICKLY
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
This section provides instructions for shutting down and powering down the entire system. However,
turning the site system supply switch (wallbox) off and on too quickly can cause some fuses to blow and
can potentially cause damage to the system.
For servicing purposes it is usually not necessary to turn power off to the entire system using the system
supply switch (wallbox). Normally it will only be necessary to turn off power to the items being serviced.
It is not necessary to power down the host or the CIRS unless those are the items to be serviced. For that
reason this section contains procedures for removing power from individual subsystems in addition to
complete system power down.
To power down the complete system:
1. Shutdown the CIRS according to the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
2. Shutdown the host according to the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 2 Brilliance 6‐64, Big
2.1.1 Gantry Power Down (Except for the Host and CIRS)
This procedure will shut down all gantry power except for incoming power and will leave power on to
the host and the CIRS.
1. Ensure that the keyswitch on the scan control box is OFF.
2. If the scanner application is running:
a) Bring up the scanner application Home menu by clicking on the Home tab along the top of the
window.
b) On the scanner application Home menu left panel, click on the Logout button.
WARNING: EXERCIZE PROPER PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID CONTACT WITH LIVE CONNECTIONS while
servicing. Hazardous voltages ARE PRESENT IN THE GANTRY SUPPORT. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death.
3. Remove the left upper gantry support cover according to the Gantry RH/LH Upper Side Cover
Removal procedure in the applicable Gantry Repair and Replacement Manual.
4. Momentarily press and release the blue button on the side of the gantry switch panel as shown in
Figure 2‐1 on page 38. This will deenergize the utility contractor (UTK).
Figure 2-1: Gantry Power Toggle Button
BLUE BUTTON
!
CAUTION: WAIT AT LEAST 30 SECONDS AFTER TOGGLING THE POWER BUTTON OFF BEFORE TURNING
IT BACK ON. THE BLUE POWER BUTTON IS A TOGGLE SWITCH. PRESSING IT ONCE
TOGGLES IT OFF; PRESSING IT AGAIN TOGGLES IT ON. TOGGLING THE POWER BUTTON
OFF AND ON TOO QUICKLY MAY CAUSE SOME FUSES TO BLOW.
5. On systems that don’t have the blue button, remove fuses F354, F355, and F356 as shown in Figure 2‐2
on page 39.
Figure 2-2: Utility Transformer Fuses

UTILITY FUSES
F354, F355, F356
2.1.2 Removing Table Power
WARNING: Hazardous voltages ARE PRESENT IN THE GANTRY. EXERCIZE PROPER PRECAUTIONS TO
AVOID CONTACT WITH LIVE CONNECTIONS while servicing. Failure to do so may result in
serious injury or death.
To only remove power to the patient table without removing power to the entire gantry:
1. Ensure that the keyswitch on the scan control box to OFF.
2. If the scanner application is running, bring up the application Home menu by clicking on the Home
tab along the top of the window.
3. On the application Home menu left panel, click on the Logout button.
4. Remove the left upper gantry support cover according to the Gantry RH/LH Upper Side Cover
Removal procedure in the applicable Gantry Repair and Replacement Manual.
5. On the switch panel turn OFF circuit breakers CB303 (Patient Table and Tilt Power) and CB304
(Patient Table Drive) shown in Figure 2‐3 on page 41.
Figure 2-3: Gantry Switch Panel

P/T & TILT PWR SUP
CB303
P/T DRIVE
CB304
2.2 System Power Up

1. Ensure that the incoming power is turned on.
2. If the gantry has been powered down perform the following:
!
CAUTION: THE BLUE BUTTON IS A TOGGLE SWITCH. PRESSING IT ONCE TOGGLES IT ON; PRESSING
IT AGAIN TOGGLES IT OFF. AFTER PRESSING IT BE SURE TO WAIT AT LEAST 30 SECONDS
BEFORE PRESSING IT AGAIN OR SOME FUSES MAY BLOW.
a) On systems that have a gantry power toggle button (blue button) momentarily press and release
the blue button on the side of the gantry switch panel as shown in Figure 2-4 on page 42.
Figure 2-4: .Gantry Power Toggle Button
BLUE BUTTON
b) On systems that don’t have the blue button, replace and close fuses F354, F355, and F356 as
shown in Figure 2-5 on page 43.
Figure 2-5: Utility Transformer Fuses

UTILITY FUSES
F354, F355, F356
3. If the table has been powered down, on the switch panel turn ON circuit breakers CB303 (Patient
Table and Tilt Power) and CB304 (Patient Table Drive) shown in Figure 2‐6 on page 44.
P/T & TILT PWR SUP

CB303
P/T DRIVE
CB304
2.2.1 CIRS and System Startup

1. If the system has a CIRS UPS, turn it ON.
2. Power up the CIRS according to the procedure in the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
3. Turn on power to the Host PC according to the procedure in the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
Section 3
Section 3 Placing the Brilliance 6-64 and Big Bore Patient Support
into the Service Mode
1. If gantry power is off, turn gantry power ON according to the power‐up procedure “System Power
Up” on page 41.
WARNING: Exercise PROPER PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID CONTACT WITH LIVE CONNECTIONS while
servicing. Hazardous voltages ARE PRESENT IN THE GANTRY LH side cover. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death.
2. If it is not already off, remove the left upper gantry support cover according to the procedure in the
applicable Brilliance Gantry Repair and Replacement Manual.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 3 Placing the Brilliance
3. Place the Mode Key Switch on the gantry switch panel into the “SERV” position. Refer to Figure 3‐1.
MODE KEY SWITCH
4. Turn ON the patient support service switch. (The service switch is a rocker switch right next to the
UP/DOWN service push buttons. The UP/DOWN service push buttons will light when the patient
support is in the Service Mode and the service switch is on.
!
CAUTION: DO NOT RAISE OR LOWER THE PATIENT SUPPORT TO THE MECHANICAL LIMITS WHILE IT IS
THE SERVICE MODE. ALL PATIENT SUPPORT SAFETY MECHANISMS ARE DISABLED IN
SERVICE MODE. MOVING THE PATIENT SUPPORT TO MECHANICAL LIMITS WILL CAUSE
DAMAGE TO COMPONENTS.
Section 4
Section 4 Brilliance iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up
4.1 General Information
WARNING: BEFORE REMOVING THE GANTRY LEFT OR REAR COVERS TURN off all SCANNER POWER
SUPPLY breakers on the POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT, wait at least ten minutes for energy to
be discharged, and VERIFY WITH A MULTIMETER THAT THE VOLTAGE HAS DISCHARGED.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL ELECTRIC
SHOCK.
WARNING: Stay clear of the main drive electronics for at least ten minutes for energy to be discharged
after turning off gantry motion breaker. hazardous voltages are present on the main drive
electronics inside the gantry front cover that will persist for some time after the power is
turned off. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
Items that will retain power for up to 10 minutes after

power has been turned off:
• Power Slip Rings (in the rear of the gantry) (+/- 375 VDC)
• Brush Blocks and Cables (in the rear of the gantry) (+/- 375 VDC)
• DC-DC Converter and Cables (in the left column of the gantry) (+/- 375 VDC)
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 4 Brilliance iCT Gantry
• Main Drive Electronics (Rotor Motion Controller, Brake Resistor Assembly, Inductor
Assembly) (inside the front cover on the lower right column)
• Motor Segments & Cabling (in the rear of the gantry)
• High Voltage area High Voltage Inverter Assembly on the Rotor
4.2 Brilliance iCT System Power Down/Power Up

For servicing purposes, it is usually not necessary to turn power off to the entire system using the site
system supply switch (wall box) or the main input breaker on the Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
Normally, it will only be necessary to turn off power to the area being serviced.
It is not normally necessary to power down the host or the CIRS unless those are the items to be serviced.
For that reason, this section contains procedures for removing power from the gantry in addition to
complete system power down.
4.2.1 Complete iCT System Shutdown and Power Down

To power down the complete system:
1. Power down the server(s) according to the procedure in the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
2. Power Down the Host according to the procedure in the applicable Workspace Service Manual.
3. Turn OFF the main input breaker on the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) (see Figure 4‐1).
4. To turn off all power to the PDU:
a. Turn OFF the backup power unit (UPS), if it has one.
b. Turn OFF the site main supply (wallbox) breaker.
Figure 4-1: Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
DC/DC BOOST MOTION CONSOLE/ EMERGENCY POWER

MAIN INPUT
COMPRESSOR POWER OFF INDICATOR
GANTRY / PDU AUX
GANTRY GANTRY
CONSOLE
MOTION STATOR
GANTRY
COMPRESSOR ROTOR
PDU OUTPUT BREAKERS
4.2.2 Complete iCT Gantry Power Down (Except for the Host and
CIRS)
This procedure will shut down all power to the gantry but will leave power on to the host, the CIRS, the
PDU, and the compressor.
WARNING: Turn off the dc/dc boost power and wait at least ten minutes for energy to be discharged
BEFORE REMOVING THE GANTRY LEFT OR REAR COVERS AND VERIFY WITH A MULTIMETER
THAT THE VOLTAGE HAS DISCHARGED. Hazardous voltages are present inside the gantry
left and REAR covers that will persist for some time after the power is turned off. FAILURE
TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL ELECTRIC SHOCK.
WARNING: Stay clear of the main drive electronics for at least ten minutes for energy to be discharged
after turning off gantry motion breaker. Hazardous voltages are present on the main drive
electronics inside the gantry front cover that will persist for some time after the power is
turned off. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
WARNING: Turn rotor and stator power off before working in these areas with the covers open or
removed. Hazardous voltages are present inside the gantry front cover and the gantry left
cover. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
To turn off power to the gantry:
1. Ensure that the keyswitch on the scan control box is OFF.
2. If the scanner application is running:
a. Bring up the scanner application Home menu by clicking on the Home tab along the top of the
window.
b. On the scanner application Home menu left panel, click on the Logout button.
3. On the system PDU (see Figure 4‐1):
a. Turn OFF the Rotor and Stator breakers.
!
CAUTION: Always turn off the Rotor breaker when turning the Stator breaker off. The Stator breaker
supplies fans that cool both the rotor and stator. Leaving the Rotor breaker on with the
Stator breaker off may cause damage to the rotor due to overheating.
• Turn OFF Gantry Motion Breaker
• Turn OFF DC-DC Boost breaker.
4. Wait 10 min. for the power to discharge before opening the front, left, or rear covers.
4.2.3 Powering Down the iCT Patient Support Only

If it is desired to leave gantry stator power on while powering down the patient support, perform the
following procedure:
1. On the system PDU (see Figure 4‐1):
a) Turn OFF the Rotor breaker.
• Turn OFF Gantry Motion Breaker
• Turn OFF DC-DC Boost breaker.
BEFORE REMOVING THE GANTRY LEFT COVER AND VERIFY WITH A MULTIMETER THAT THE
VOLTAGE HAS DISCHARGED. Hazardous voltages are present inside the gantry left cover
that will persist for some time after the power is turned off. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL ELECTRIC SHOCK.
servicing. Hazardous voltages ARE STILL PRESENT IN THE GANTRY. Failure to do so may
2. Wait 10 min. for the power to discharge.
3. Remove the left gantry cover according to the procedure in the Brilliance iCT Repair and Replacement
Manual.
4. Turn off CB106 (see Figure 4‐2).
Figure 4-2: Patient Support 230 VAC Supply Breaker
CB106
PATIENT SUPPORT 230 VAC
SUPPLY BREAKER
4.3 Brilliance iCT System Power Up

1. If it has been turned off, turn ON the site system supply breaker (wall box).
2. If equipped, turn on the backup power supply (UPS).
3. Turn ON the main input breaker on the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) (see Figure 4‐1).
4. Turn ON all breakers on the system PDU (see Figure 4‐1):
!
CAUTION: Always turn on the Stator breaker when the Rotor breaker is on. The Stator breaker supplies
fans that cool both the rotor and stator. Leaving the Rotor breaker on with the Stator
breaker off may cause damage to the rotor due to overheating.
5. If power to the CIRS and the host was turned off:
a. Turn ON the UPS according to the applicable procedure.
b. Power up the Host according to the procedure in the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
c. Power up the server(s) according to the procedure in the applicable CIRS Service Manual.
Section 5
Section 5 Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the
Service Mode
1. On the system PDU:
a. Turn OFF the Rotor breaker.
b. Turn OFF Gantry Motion Breaker
c. Turn OFF DC‐DC Boost breaker.
BEFORE REMOVING THE GANTRY LEFT COVER AND VERIFY WITH A MULTIMETER THAT THE
VOLTAGE HAS DISCHARGED. Hazardous voltages are present inside the gantry left cover
that will persist for some time after the power is turned off. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN PERSONNEL RECEIVING POTENTIALLY FATAL ELECTRIC SHOCK.
2. Wait 10 min. for the power to discharge.
servicing. Hazardous voltages ARE STILL PRESENT IN THE GANTRY. Failure to do so may
3. Remove the left gantry cover according to the procedure in the Brilliance iCT Repair and Replacement
Manual.
4. With a multimeter measure the voltage between the HV input leads as shown in Figure 5‐1 on
page 57. There should not be any voltage. If there is voltage, make sure the DC‐DC Boost breaker on
the PDU is OFF and wait until the voltage is zero.
Figure 5-1: Checking for Voltage

CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THESE
TWO INPUT TERMINALS
5. On the ACCU board, turn the service keyswitch into the service position to allow operation of the
couch with the service controls (see Figure 5‐2).
Figure 5-2: Service Switch on ACCU

LEFT RIGHT
NORMAL SERVICE
!
CAUTION: DO NOT DRIVE THE PATIENT SUPPORT TO THE VERTICAL MECHANICAL LIMITS. ALL
PATIENT SUPPORT TRAVEL LIMITS ARE DISABLED IN SERVICE MODE. DRIVING TO
MECHANICAL LIMITS MAY DAMAGE PATIENT SUPPORT COMPONENTS.
6. Remove the patient support service switch cover at the RH head end of the base trim cover (see
Figure 5‐3).
7. Turn ON the patient support service switch (see Figure 5‐4). The indicator light will come on when
the switch is ON.
8. Using the couch service controls, position the couch top high enough to allow installation of the
lifting tool (so the top is about the mid‐point of the gantry bore).
Figure 5-3: Couch Service Switch Cover Figure 5-4: Couch Service Controls
UP DOWN ON/OFF
Section 6
Section 6 Replacing Sub-frame Service Lock
The purpose of this procedure is to repair and replace the service lock assembly on the CT Brilliance
Patient Support.
Note: In this procedure, take note of the screw sizes and location during removal, to simplify replacement.
Note: The following parts are required for the Subframe Service Lock Assembly Repair & Replacement and must be ordered
separately, if FCO72800618 was not already performed:
• Block Assembly Lock Stop Subframe, (1 Qty.)
• Screw, Hex S.H.C. 1/4-20 x 5/8, (2 Qty.)
• Nut-Serrated Flange, 3/8-16 Grade 8, (1 Qty.)
• SHCS Button Head 1/4-20 x 0.75, (2 Qty.)
Note: 12nc numbers for the required parts can be pulled from the FCO number listed above. Be sure to read any additional
notes listed in SPS.
The following tools are required for the subframe service lock assembly replacement:
• Torque wrench kit (4535 675 28581)
• 9/64” hex bit
• 3/16” hex bit
• 3/8” socket
• 7/16” socket
• 3-inch extension
• #1 Philips screwdriver
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 6 Replacing Sub‐frame
6.1 Removing the Subframe Rear Cover, ESD Cover

and RH Subframe Cover
1. To access the subframe service lock, the following covers must be removed: the Subframe Rear Cover,
ESD Cover (if present) and RH Subframe Cover. For cover removal instructions, see “Brilliance
Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal” on page 93.
2. See Figure 6‐1 on page 62 and Figure 6‐2 on page 63 for the patient support shown with and without
an ESD cover.
Figure 6-1: Patient Support With ESD Cover
Standard / Bariatric Patient Support ESD Cover for the

with ESD Cover Extended Patient Support
Figure 6-2: Patient Support with ESD Cover Removed
6.2 Removing the Sub-frame Service Lock

1. Using a 9/16” Socket and Ratchet Wrench, unscrew the lock nut from the Block Assembly Lock Stop.
See note on page 55, and see Figure 6‐3 on page 64.
a. The Patient Support Subframe is now disengaged from the base.
Figure 6-3: Lock Nut Removal from Lock Stop Block Assembly
Locknut
2. Using a 3/16” Hex Tool, remove the two (2) SHCS that secure the Block Assembly Quick Lock to the
front right side of the inner subframe (Figure 6‐4 on page 65).
Figure 6-4: SHCS Removal from Block Assembly Quick Lock
3. Remove the Block Assembly Quick Lock and set aside for reinstallation (see Figure 6‐5 on page 66).

Do not discard block assembly, it will be reused at installation.
Figure 6-5: Removal of Block Assembly
a. Using a 5/32” Hex Tool, remove the two (2) Button Head Cap Screws that secure the Block
Assembly Lock Stop to the front right side of the inner sub‐frame.
b. Slide out the Lock Stop Block Assembly. See note on page 55 (see Figure 6‐6 on page 66).
Figure 6-6: Removal of Screws and Lock Stop Block Assembly
6.3 Installing the Sub-frame Service Lock
Note: Loctite can be stored at room temperature for at least one year. Always check the expiration date on the Loctite 242
(p/n 4535 660 77232) prior to use. Close the bottle when not in use.
1. Using a 5/32” Hex Tool and two (2) Button Head Cap Screws, install the Block Assembly Lock Stop on
the front right side of the inner sub‐frame (Figure 6‐7 on page 67).
Figure 6-7: Installing the Screws and Lock Stop Block Assembly
Block
Assembly Button Head
Lock Stop Cap Screws
a. Apply Loctite 242 to secure the two (2) Button Head Cap Screws.
b. Tighten the screws until snug, but do not torque at this time.
2. Using a 3/16” Hex Tool, reinstall the original Block Assembly Quick Lock on the front side of the inner
subframe. See Figure 6‐8, below.
Figure 6-8: Reinstallation of the Block Assembly
Block Assembly
Quick Lock
a. Apply Loctite 242 to secure the two (2) Socket Head Cap Screws (SHCS).
b. Tighten the SHCS fasteners until snug, but do not torque at this time.
c. Slide the outer subframe toward the gantry, so that the quick lock bolt engages the block assembly.
d. Make sure the bolt moves in and out of the block assembly, without rubbing or obstructing the
subframe from engaging.
e. Torque the Lock Stop Block SHCS fasteners to 11 FT‐LBS (14.9 N/m). See Figure 6‐9 on page 69.
f. Torque the Button Head Cap Screws to 34.8 IN‐LBS (3.9 N/m) for the block assembly lock stop.
3. Verify the parts are aligned and the latch is engaged.
4. Install the locknut / nut serrated flange. See Figure 6‐9, below.
Figure 6-9: Installing the Lock Nut on the Block Assembly Lock Stop
SHCS Fasteners
Lock Nut /
for Lock Stop Block
Serrated Flange
a. Torque the nut to 23 ft‐lbs (31.2 N/m).
5. If an ESD cover is present, secure it to the head end of the patient support table by replacing and
hand‐tightening the 8 screws for the standard / bariatric patient support, or 5 screws for the extended
patient support (see Figure 8‐4 on page 97).
6.4 Subframe Cover Installation

1. See Figure 8‐13: Standard / Bariatric Subframe Cover Removal on page 8‐106, to reinstall the
subframe covers.
Section 7
Section 7 Placing Lower Covers into the Service Position and
Installing the Vertical Safety Support
This section contains procedures for placing the telescoping patient support panel covers into the service
position and installing the vertical safety support.
Tools Required: FE Tool Kit.
WARNING: the vertical safety support brace must be installed whenever personnel are working under
the patient support. failure to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
If the patient support cannot be raised to install the safety support, refer to the section “Servicing the
Patient Support when it Cannot be Driven Vertically” on page 87.
7.1 Placing the Covers into the Service Position
Note: On iCT systems the service pendant can be used instead of the controls on the base of the couch. Refer to the
procedure “Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the Service Mode” on page 56 for using the couch
service pendant.
1. Remove two screws ‐ one on each side ‐ near the head end of the decorative molding cover on patient
support base. Slide cover out and remove.
For Brilliance 6‐64 and BB couches, refer to Figure on page 71 and Figure 7‐2 on page 72. For
Brilliance iCT couches, refer to Figure 7‐3 on page 73. On some systems it may also be necessary to
remove the service switch cover screws (see Figure 7‐2 on page 72 and Figure 7‐3 on page 73).
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 7 Placing Lower Covers
Figure 7-1: Decorative Molding Cover Removal
Remove Screw on each side
Figure 7-2: Service Switch Cover (RH Head End, Brilliance 6‐64 or BB couch)

DECORATIVE MOLDING
COVER
SERVICE SWITCH
COVER
DECORATIVE MOLDING
COVER SCREW HOLE
2. Place the patient support into the service mode using the procedure for the type of system, either
“Placing the Brilliance 6‐64 and Big Bore Patient Support into the Service Mode” on page 45 or
“Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the Service Mode” on page 56.
the switch is ON.
!
CAUTION: Do not drive the table to the mechanical limits. All patient support travel limits are disabled
in service mode. Driving the table too far will cause mechanical damage.
Figure 7-3: iCT Couch Service Switch Cover Figure 7-4: iCT Couch Service Controls

(other models are similar) (other models are similar)
UP DOWN ON/OFF
4. Using the table service controls, raise the table up enough to get access to the bolts in the base shown
in Figure 7‐5 on page 75.
5. Remove four screws securing footswitch top cover, and remove the cover.
6. Remove two bolts and lock washers from patient support front base. Refer to Figure 7‐5 on page 75.
7. Remove two bolts and lock washers from patient support rear base. Refer to Figure 7‐5 on page 75.
Figure 7-5: Patient Support Base Front Details (Similar For Base Rear)
BOLTS AND LOCKWASHERS
ON BASE FRONT (2)
8. Lower patient support using patient support service DOWN push button or couch service control
pendant switch until the service bracket can be installed as shown in Figure 7‐7 on page 77. Be careful
not to go any lower than necessary because it may damage the couch.
!
CAUTION: Do not drive the table to the mechanical limits. All patient support travel limits are disabled
in service mode. Driving the table too far will cause mechanical damage.
9. Install service brackets over panel covers at patient support front and rear base, using bolts and lock
washers removed in Step 6 on page 74. and Step 7 on page 74. Refer to Figure 7‐6 on page 76 and
Figure 7‐7 on page 77.
Figure 7-6: Attaching Service Brackets to Patient Support (Typical For Both Ends of Patient Support)

(see Figure 7‐6 on page 76)
BRACKET BOLTS
(2 FRONT, 2 REAR)
Figure 7-7: Service Brackets Installed (Typical For Both Ends Of Patient Support)
WARNING: Observe proper precautions when operating or working on patient support with covers
removed. Dangerous voltages are exposed when the patient support covers are removed.
Contact with these voltages may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
WARNING: Keep equipment and personnel away from the patient support vertical scissor-action
mechanism which is exposed when the patient support telescoping base covers are
removed. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or serious injury and/or
death to service personnel.
10. Raise patient support approximately six inches and disconnect the four ground wires from lugs
located on patient support base (see Figure 7‐8).
Figure 7-8: Telescoping Covers Ground Wires
RIGHT SIDE COVER

GROUND WIRE
FOOT-END COVER
FOOT-END COVER GROUND WIRE
GROUND WIRES
11. Install the vertical safety support according the following procedure “Installing the Vertical Safety
Support” on page 80.
WARNING: Install the vertical safety support brace whenever personnel are working under the table.
Failure to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
7.2 Installing the Vertical Safety Support

The vertical safety support is a safety device designed to keep the patient support scissors mechanism in
the full upright position.
1. Place the patient support covers into the service position according to the preceding procedure
“Placing Lower Covers into the Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on
page 70.
WARNING: Use proper precautions when operating or working on equipment with covers removed.
Dangerous voltages are exposed when the covers are removed. Accidental contact with
these voltages may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
2. Place the patient support into the service mode (see “Placing the Brilliance 6‐64 and Big Bore Patient
Support into the Service Mode” on page 45 or “Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the
Service Mode” on page 56).
3. Raise the patient support just enough to allow the vertical support to be installed as shown in
Figure 7‐9 on page 82. Be sure to stop before the scissor carriage bearing touches the support (see
Figure 7‐9). Do not drive carriage into support as this may cause misalignment of the vertical drive
mechanism.
!
CAUTION: DO NOT DRIVE THE SCISSORS CARRIAGE INTO THE VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT. FAILURE
TO COMPLY WILL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE BALLSCREW.
Figure 7-9: Vertical Support Holder & Placement

VERTICAL SUPPORT IN SECURING CABLE TIE VERTICAL SUPPORT
STORAGE HOLDER SHOULD BE REPLACED INSTALLED
AFTER EVERY USE
STOP VERTICAL MOTION BEFORE SISSOR

BEARING HITS SUPPORT
4. Locate the green safety vertical support mounted to face of scissor (see Figure 7‐9). Cut the tie‐wrap
that confines the support cable and remove the support from the holder. Install the support as shown
5. Lower the patient support slowly until the table is tight against the safety support. Do not drive
carriage into support as this may cause misalignment of the vertical drive mechanism.
Note: On extended patient supports driving the support top down against the safety support bar will pull the vertical ball
screw nut out of it’s pocket and damage the safety microswitches. It will also be very difficult to get the vertical
ballscrew nut back in place.
6. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down
Procedure, either “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on
page 36 or “Brilliance iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up” on page 48.
7.3 Removing the Vertical Safety Support
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN OPERATING OR WORKING ON EQUIPMENT WITH COVERS
REMOVED. DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE EXPOSED WHEN THE patient support COVERS ARE
REMOVED. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH THESE VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
AND/OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.
!
WARNING: Keep equipment and personnel away from the mechanical action of the scissor-action
mechanism that is exposed when the patient support telescoping base covers are removed.
Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or serious injury and/or death to
service personnel.
1. Turn ON power to the patient support. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down
2. With the couch covers still in the service position and the couch still in the service mode (see “Placing
Lower Covers into the Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 70), raise
the patient support using the couch service controls or the service pendant just enough to allow
removal of the vertical safety support.
Be sure to stop before the scissor carriage bearing touches the support (see Figure ). Do not drive
carriage into support as this may cause misalignment of the vertical drive mechanism.
!
CAUTION: ALL PATIENT SUPPORT SAFETY MECHANISMS ARE DISABLED IN SERVICE MODE. TAKE CARE
NOT TO DAMAGE PATIENT SUPPORT COMPONENTS.
3. Remove the vertical safety support and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor. Refer to Figure
on page 82.
4. Secure the support cable with a short tie‐wrap fed through the mount on the side of the support
holder. Refer to Figure on page 82.
7.4 Taking Patient Support Covers out of Service

Position
1. With service brackets still in place, lower patient support to approximately six inches from floor.
2. Install the four ground wires to lugs located on patient support base (see Figure 7‐10 on page 86).
Figure 7-10: Telescoping Covers Ground Wires
RIGHT SIDE COVER

GROUND WIRE
FOOT-END COVER
FOOT-END COVER GROUND WIRE
GROUND WIRES
3. Lower patient support using patient support service DOWN push button or couch service control
pendant switch until the service brackets can be removed as shown in Figure 7‐7 on page 77. Be
careful not to go any lower than necessary because it may damage the couch.
!
CAUTION: Do not raise or lower the patient support to the mechanical limits. All patient support safety
mechanisms are disabled in service mode. Driving the table to the mechanical limits will
cause equipment damage.
4. Remove four bolts and lock washers securing service brackets at patient support front and rear base.
Refer to Figure 7‐6 on page 76.
5. Install the four bolts and lock washers removed in step 4. to patient support front and rear base. Refer
to
Figure 7‐5 on page 75
6. Install footswitch cover and secure with four screws.
7. Install the couch base decorative molding cover (see Figure 7‐1 on page 71).
8. Turn the patient support service switch OFF and install the service switch cover on patient support
base and secure each with two screws (see Figure 7‐2 on page 72 and Figure 7‐3 on page 73).
9. Turn the system service mode switch to the normal mode position. If needed, refer to the procedure
for the type of system, either “Placing the Brilliance 6‐64 and Big Bore Patient Support into the Service
Mode” on page 45 or “Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the Service Mode” on page 56.
7.5 Servicing the Patient Support when it Cannot be

Driven Vertically
This procedure is to be used for replacing the vertical drive motor, the vertical brake, or the inverter if the
patient support cannot be raised to install the vertical support. The patient support can be driven
vertically for replacement of all other items as long as those 3 items are functional.
WARNING MALFUNCTION OR REMOVAL OF SOME VERTICAL DRIVE

COMPONENTS WILL CAUSE THE PATIENT SUPPORT TO FALL. THE
VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT BRACE MUST BE INSTALLED, THE
PATIENT SUPPORT LOWERED TO THE LOWER MECHANICAL LIMIT,
OR ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED BEFORE PERSONNEL ARE PRESENT
UNDER IT. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY
OR DEATH.
!
CAUTION: Do not attempt to lift the patient support top. Attempting to lift the top may cause
mechanical damage to the support.
To replace the vertical drive motor, the vertical brake, or the inverter when the patient support cannot be
raised to install the vertical safety support preform the following:
1. Remove LH, RH, and rear lower subframe covers. Refer to “Brilliance Subframe RH, LH, and Rear
Covers Removal” on page 93.
the switch is ON.
Note: Older units do not have a service mode indicator but the service mode switch will illuminate when the service mode
is activated.
!
CAUTION: ALL PATIENT SUPPORT SAFETY MECHANISMS ARE DISABLED IN SERVICE MODE. DO NOT
RAISE OR LOWER THE PATIENT SUPPORT TO THE MECHANICAL LIMITS. DRIVING THE
TABLE TO THE MECHANICAL LIMITS MAY CAUSE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
Figure 7-11: iCT Couch Service Switch Cover Figure 7-12: iCT Couch Service Controls

UP DOWN ON/OFF
4. If the support is not already all the way down because the motor or inverter is non‐functional, lower
the support in small increments by briefly and repeatedly pressing the DOWN service control button
to release the brake in short bursts and jog the support down until it is fully down.
!
CAUTION: Do not hold the down service button pressed continuously if the motor or inverter is non-
functional. Only press the down button to release the vertical brake for short intervals to
lower the support gently into the hard stop. Holding the down button continuously may
cause the support to fall quickly and hit the hard stops abruptly causing damage to the
system.
If the vertical brake is inoperable and the support cannot be moved down, DO NOT ATTTEMPT TO
MAKE A REPAIR TO THE PATIENT SUPPORT. Contact the appropriate 3rd level support FSE for
further action.
WARNING: malfunction or removal of some vertical drive components will cause the patient support to
fall. do not work under the support when the vertical safety support brace is not installed or
the patient support lowered to the lower mechanical limit. failure to do so may result in
personnel injury or death.
5. Remove the patient support lower telescoping covers according to the procedure (see ‘Removing the
Lower Telescoping Covers on page 129).
WARNING: removal OF the vertical drive motor or brake will cause the patient support to fall. do not
remove the vertical motor or brake unless the patient support upper frame is adequately
supported by blocks or jacks. failure to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
6. With the support upper frame all the way down:
• The vertical drive motor can be replaced according to the procedure (see ‘Vertical Drive Motor &
Encoder Belt Removal/Replacement on page 189).
• The vertical brake can be replaced by removing the vertical drive motor first according to the
procedure (see ‘Vertical Drive Motor & Encoder Belt Removal/Replacement on page 189), and while
the motor is removed replacing the brake according to the procedure (see ‘Vertical Brake Removal /
Replacement on page 210), then reinstalling the motor.
• The inverter can be replaced according to the procedure (see ‘Inverter Panel Removal / Replacement
Procedure on page 141).
7. Once the required component(s) have been replaced, install the patient support lower telescoping
covers according to the procedure (see ‘Installing the Lower Telescoping Covers on page 134).
8. Install the LH, RH, and rear subframe covers (see “Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation”
on page 107).
9. Take the patient support out of the service mode.
10. Test the patient support and system to make sure they are operating correctly.
Section 8
Section 8 Patient Support Covers Removal / Replacement
This section contains procedures on removing the patient support covers, and placing the telescoping
patient support panel covers in service position.
Tools Required:
• FSE Tool Kit.
• Torque Wrench Kit (453567528581, TC327)
• Specific tools used include: 9/64 hex key, 3/16 hex key, 3/8 socket, 7/16 socket, 3 inch extension, and #1
Phillips Screwdriver.
• Feeler gages totaling 0.100” inches thickness (2.54 mm) are required for adjusting subframe cover
mounting blocks (see Figure 8‐14 on page 108).
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 8 Patient Support
8.1 Subframe Covers Removal and Replacement

8.1.1 Brilliance Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal
Refer to section Removing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers on page 120 for MX8000 Dual v.EXP
subframe covers.
Refer to (Figure 8‐1) for identification of the patient support subframe covers.
1. To remove the Brilliance Subframe RH, LH and Rear Covers:
a. Place the patient support into Service Mode. See “Placing the Brilliance 6‐64 and Big Bore Patient
Support into the Service Mode” on page 45, or “Placing the Brilliance iCT Patient Support into the
Service Mode” on page 56.
b. Move the patient support carbon top all the way out of the gantry.
Figure 8-1: Top, RH, LH, and Rear Subframe Covers
SUBFRAME TOP COVER

Front End of
Patient Support
LH SUBFRAME COVER
SUBFRAME REAR COVER
Rear End of
Patient Support RH SUBFRAME COVER
NOTE: Standard and Bariatric Patient Supports shown, extended patient support similar.
2. Using a 3/16” hex bit, loosen the two internal screws (one on each side) securing both sides of the
subframe rear cover through slots at rear of patient support. Refer to Figure 8‐2, below. The mounting
brackets are slotted, so it should not be necessary to remove the screws.
Figure 8-2: Removal of Screws Securing Subframe Rear Cover
Screw securing rear subframe
cover is accessed through slot
3. Gently work the two rear subframe cover pins loose from the two rear stops and remove cover.
Figure 8-3: Subframe Rear Cover Removal
Pins slide into rear stops
4. If an ESD cover is present at the head end of the table, remove the 8 screws for the standard / bariatric
patient support or 5 screws for the extended patient support. Remove the cover over the open area
under the head end. Refer to Figure 8‐4 and Figure 8‐5.
Figure 8-4: Head‐End ESD Cover

Extended
Standard / Bariatric
ESD Cover
ESD Cover with
with no Joy Stick Option
Joy Stick Option
Figure 8-5: Patient Support Top with ESD Cover Removed
5. If the support has the joystick option, disconnect the joystick cable as shown in Figure 8‐6.
Figure 8-6: Joystick Cable Connection
DISCONNECT
JOYSTICK CABLE
6. Using a 3/8” socket and ratchet wrench or 3/8” nut driver, remove the two nuts and flat washers
securing the RH and LH subframe covers to studs on front subframe mounting bracket. Refer to
Figure 8‐7.
Figure 8-7: Location of Studs on Front Mounting Bracket

COVER MOUNTING STUDS (2)
LH Subframe Cover
RH Subframe Cover
COVER MOUNTING BRACKET (2)
7. If present, remove the 2 screws and remove the foot‐end ESD cover (see Figure 8‐8).
Figure 8-8: Foot‐End ESD Cover
REMOVE 2 ESD
COVER CREWS
8. Using a 3/16” hex bit, remove the screw securing the LH subframe cover to RH subframe cover. Refer
to Figure 8‐9 on page 102 for standard patient supports and Figure 8‐10 on page 103 for bariatric
patient supports.
9. On standard patient supports, remove the 3/16” hex screw that attaches the RH subframe cover to the
subframe (see Figure 8‐9).
Figure 8-9: Subframe Cover Attaching Hardware (Standard Patient Support)
Remove 3/16” Hex Screw Attaching Remove 3/16” Hex Screw Attaching
LH Cover to RH Covers RH Cover to Subframe
10. See Figure 8‐10 for the 3/16” hex screws to remove or loosen for the subframe left‐hand cover

attaching hardware on the bariatric patient support.
Figure 8-10: Subframe LH Cover Attaching Hardware (Bariatric Patient Support)
Remove 3/16” Hex Screw
Loosen the 3/16” Hex Screw to Rotate the Bracket

From Under the Slot on the Subframe Cover
11. On the Extended Patient Support, use needle nose pliers to remove the Hairpin Cotter Pin
(459800129931) from the hole at the rear end of the LH cover.
Figure 8-11: RH Subframe Cover Attaching Hardware (Extended Patient Support)
.042 Hairpin Cotter Pin (459800129931, 1 Qty.)
12. Lower the front of the RH subframe cover off the mounting studs, grasp the bottom of the cover and
gently pull the cover away from patient support upper subframe. The cover is supported by three
blocks that engage a lip on the subframe. See Figure 8‐12 on page 8‐105 for Extended Subframe
Covers and Figure 8‐13 on page 8‐106 for Standard / Bariatric Subframe Covers.
a. The LH subframe cover does not require removal to access the quick lock assembly. However, the
front of the LH subframe may need to be pulled off of the mounting studs just enough to allow the
RH subframe cove to be fully removed.
13. If the LH cover requires removal, grasp the bottom of the LH cover and gently pull the cover away
from patient support upper subframe. Refer to Figure 8‐12 on page 105.
Figure 8-12: Extended Subframe Cover Removal
COVER SUPPORT BLOCKS LH Subframe Cover Front End of

(molded into cover) See Step 12a Patient Support
RH Subframe Cover
Rear End of
Patient Support
Figure 8-13: Standard / Bariatric Subframe Cover Removal

Front End
LH Subframe Cover of Patient Support
See Step 12a
RH Subframe Cover
Cover Support Blocks
Molded into Cover)
Cover Blocks
Rear End
Engage Subframe of Patient Support
Lower Lip
8.1.2 Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation

1. If the new RH and LH covers have mounting block adjustments (see Figure 8‐14) set the adjustments
as follows:
a. Insert a stack of feeler gages with a total thickness between 0.098 in. and 0.103 in. (2.49 mm and 2.62
mm) into the mounting block opening as shown in Figure 8‐14 on page 108. The gages should fit
snugly in the gap.
b. If the feeler gages will not go into the gap or are not snug in the gap, loosen the locknut and adjust
the setscrew so that the feeler gages fit snugly in the gap. When the gap is correct, hold the
setscrew in position and hand‐tighten the locknut. Make sure that the gap did not change.
Figure 8-14: Setting the LH and RH Side Subframe Cover Mounting Block Adjustments

Feeler Gages, 0.098” to 0.103” Thick Adjusting Screw
(2.49 mm to 2.62 mm) and Lock Nut
2. Push the patient support top all the way into the gantry.
3. Position the RH subframe cover so that the mounting blocks engage the subframe lip, and push it into
place (see Figure 8‐15 for extended subframe covers and Figure 8‐16 on page 8‐110 for standard /
bariatric subframe covers). Make sure that all the blocks are fully engaged with the subframe lip.
Figure 8-15: Extended Subframe Covers
COVER SUPPORT BLOCKS PINS ON RH COVER

(molded into cover) ENGAGE WITH LH COVER
Front End of
Patient Support
LH Subframe Cover
RH Subframe Cover
COVER BLOCKS ENGAGE Rear End of

SUBFRAME LOWER LIP Patient Support
Figure 8-16: Standard / Bariatric Subframe Covers
Front End
LH Subframe Cover of Patient Support
See Step 12a
RH Subframe Cover
Cover Support Blocks
Molded into Cover)
Cover Blocks
Rear End
Engage Subframe of Patient Support
Lower Lip
4. Position the cover so that the 2 holes in the front of the cover will go over the mounting studs under
the front of the subframe. Refer to Figure 8‐17 on page 111 and Figure 8‐7 on page 8‐100.
5. Position the LH subframe cover so that the mounting blocks engage the subframe lip (see Figure 8‐15
on page 109) and so that the rear holes will engage with the RH cover pins and push it into place.
Make sure that all the blocks are fully engaged with the subframe lip.
6. Position the cover so that the 2 holes in the front of the cover will go over the mounting studs under
the front of the subframe. Refer to Figure 8‐17 on page 111 and Figure 8‐7 on page 8‐100.
7. Loosely install 2 flat washers and two nuts onto the studs to hold the covers in place. Refer to
Figure 8‐17 on page 111 and Figure 8‐7 on page 8‐100. Leave the nuts loose so that the cover position
can be adjusted. Next, torque the nuts to 14.4 IN‐LBS (1.6 N/m).
Figure 8-17: Location of Mounting Studs at Front End of Patient Support
MOUNTING STUDS
LOCATION (2)
8. Install a screw and a flat washer and hand‐tighten to secure the RH subframe cover to LH subframe
cover. See Figure 8‐18 for standard patient supports, Figure 8‐19 on page 8‐113 for bariatric patient
supports, and Step 11 and Figure 8‐20 on page 8‐115 for Extended Patient Supports.
Figure 8-18: Subframe LH Cover Attaching Hardware (Standard Patient Support)
Install 3/16” Hex Screw
Figure 8-19: Subframe LH Cover Attaching Hardware (Bariatric Patient Support)
Install 3/16” Hex Screw
9. On bariatric tables, install the screw and lock washer and hand‐tighten to secure the RH subframe
cover angle bracket to the subframe (see Figure 12).
10. Position the subframe rear cover mounting pins to rear stops and push cover into place. Refer to
Figure 8‐3 on page 96. Center the rear cover and side covers to align with the top cover.
11. On the Extended Patient Support, use needle nose pliers to insert the Hairpin Cotter Pin
(459800129931) into the hole at the rear end of the LH cover. Make sure the covers are secured with
the Hairpin Cotter Pin (see Figure 8‐20.)
Figure 8-20: RH Subframe Cover Attaching Hardware (Extended Patient Support)
.042 Hairpin Cotter Pin (459800129931, 1 Qty.)
12. At the head end of the support, hand‐tighten the two nuts onto the studs to hold the covers in place.
Refer to Figure 8‐17 on page 111 and Figure 8‐7 on page 8‐100.
13. Position the rear subframe cover back into place and tighten the two screws to 11 FT‐LBS (14.9 N/m),
securing rear subframe cover through slots located at rear of patient support (see Figure 8‐21).
Figure 8-21: Screws Securing Subframe Rear Cover
Screw securing rear subframe
cover is accessed through slot
14. If the support has the joystick option, connect the table joystick cable (see Figure 8‐22).
Figure 8-22: Joystick Cable Connection
Connect Joystick
Cable
15. If an ESD cover was present at the head end of the table, attach the cover and hand‐tighten with the 8
screws for the standard / bariatric patient support (see Figure 8‐23), or 5 screws for the extended
patient support (not shown).
Figure 8-23: Head‐End ESD Cover (cover with joystick option shown)
16. Install the foot‐end access cover with 2 plastic screws and hand‐tighten (see Figure 8‐24).

17. Move the patient support top out of gantry.
18. Take the patient support out of service mode. Refer to Taking Patient Support Covers out of Service
Position on page 85.
19. Perform a surview scan to make sure the patient support is operating properly.
Figure 8-24: Foot‐End ESD Cover
INSTALL 2 ESD
COVER CREWS
8.1.3 Removing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers

Refer to Figure 8‐25 on page 8‐120 for identification of the patient support subframe covers.
1. Using the Operator Panel, raise the patient support to the upper limit.
Figure 8-25: RH, LH, and Rear Subframe Covers
SUBFRAME TOP COVER
HEAD END
RH SUBFRAME COVER
FOOT END
LH SUBFRAME COVER
2. Remove the 2 screws (5/32” hex key) securing the subframe cover to be removed (see Figure 8‐26).
Figure 8-26: Subframe Cover Screws Dual v.EXP
LH SUBFRAME RH SUBFRAME
COVER SCREWS COVER SCREWS
3. Remove 2 screws securing the RH and LH subframe covers at the head end of the patient support
(see Figure 8‐27).
Figure 8-27: Dual‐v.EXPHead‐End Subframe Cover Screws

(viewed from the bottom)
COVER MOUNTING SCREWS
4. Grasp the bottom of the RH cover and gently pull the cover away from patient support upper
subframe. The cover is supported by three blocks that engage a lip on the subframe (see Figure 8‐28).
Figure 8-28: Removing Subframe Cover
5. Slide the LH subframe cover toward the foot end enough so that the cover clears the horizontal drive
assembly (see Figure 8‐29).
6. Grasp the bottom of the LH cover and gently pull the cover away from patient support upper
subframe. The cover is supported by three blocks that engage a lip on the subframe.
Figure 8-29: Moving the Left Subframe Cover to Clear the Horizontal Drive Assembly
CLEAR HORIZONTAL
DRIVE ASSEMBLY
LH SUBFRAME
COVER
8.1.4 Installing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers

1. Place the LH cover onto the subframe so that the mounting blocks engage the lower lip of the
subframe.
2. Slide the LH subframe cover toward the head into it’s mounting position.
3. Place the RH cover onto the subframe so that the mounting blocks engage the lower lip of the
subframe.
4. Install the 2 screws (5/32” hex key) to secure each subframe cover (see Figure 8‐31).
Figure 8-30: Subframe Cover Screws Dual v.EXP
LH SUBFRAME RH SUBFRAME
COVER SCREWS COVER SCREWS
5. At the head end of the patient support, install 2 screws securing the RH and LH covers (see Figure 8‐
31).
Figure 8-31: Dual‐v.EXPHead‐End Subframe Cover Screws

(viewed from the bottom)
COVER MOUNTING SCREWS
8.1.5 Upper Subframe Cover Removal

1. Before removing the subframe upper cover screws, mark the position of at least 2 screws so that the
cover can be reinstalled in the same position (see Figure 8‐32).
2. Detach the subframe upper cover by removing 5 screws along each side of the underside of the
subframe. The 2 screws under the head end are shown in Figure 8‐32 on page 128 for an example. The
other 8 screws are in similar locations along each side. The top can be moved as needed to gain access
to the bearing mounting screws.
3. Slide the cover toward the head end through the gantry bore and remove it. If there is not enough
room to slide it off, release the upper subframe lock and move the subframe as far as it will go toward
the foot end. Refer to (see Figure 48‐1 on page 625).
Figure 8-32: Head‐End Subframe Cover Screws (Viewed from Underneath)
HEAD-END SUBFRAME COVER

ATTACHING SCREWS
8.1.6 Upper Subframe Cover Installation

1. Slide the subframe upper cover (see Figure 8‐1) into position and start the 10 attaching screws into
their holes.
2. Position the cover so the screws are aligned with the marks made during disassembly and tighten the
screws.
3. If the subframe quick release was disengaged:
a. For instructions to engage the subframe quick release, see Engaging the Patient Support Subframe
Quick Release on page 715.
b. For instructions to test the quick release engagement, see Testing Patient Support Subframe Quick
Release on page 717.
8.2 Patient Support Lower Telescoping Covers

Removal / Replacement
The lower patient support telescoping covers are 5 tiers composed of 2 side panels and 2 end panels for
each tier. The side and end panels are attached to each other by corner brackets at each end.
8.2.1 Removing the Lower Telescoping Covers

1. Remove LH, RH, and rear lower subframe covers. Refer to “Brilliance Subframe RH, LH, and Rear
Covers Removal” on page 93.
3. Turn ON the patient support service switch (see Figure 8‐34 on page 130). The indicator light will
come on when the switch is ON.
Note: Older units do not have a service mode indicator but the service mode switch will illuminate when the service mode
is activated.
!
CAUTION: ALL PATIENT SUPPORT SAFETY MECHANISMS ARE DISABLED IN SERVICE MODE. DO NOT
RAISE OR LOWER THE PATIENT SUPPORT TO THE MECHANICAL LIMITS. DRIVING THE
TABLE TO THE MECHANICAL LIMITS MAY CAUSE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
UP DOWN ON/OFF
Figure 8-33: iCT Support Service Switch Cover Figure 8-34: iCT Support Service Controls

4. Lower the patient support to lowest position available using patient support service DOWN push
button located at the bottom right front of the patient support.
5. Refer to Figure on page 131 and remove 3 screws securing each of the 2 upper telescoping base side
covers to the patient support subframe.
6. Turn table power OFF (for Brilliance systems see (see ‘Removing Table Power on page 40), for iCT
systems see (see ‘Powering Down the iCT Patient Support Only on page 53)).
Figure 8-35: Upper Telescoping Cover Screws

REMOVE 3 SCREWS ALONG THE TOP
OF EACH SIDE COVER
7. Use a flat‐bladed screwdriver as shown in Figure 8‐36 on page 132 to pry the outer cover away from

the next cover to allow the corner locking tab room to be released.
8. While prying the panels apart, insert a small hex key (or other suitable device) through the hole as
shown in and push in to release the locking tab that locks the corner to the end panel. Refer to
Figure 8-36: Releasing Corner Locking Tabs (See Figure 8‐37 on page 133)
SCREWDRIVER HOLDING OUTER AND

SECOND PANELS SEPARATED
HEX KEY INSERTED THROUGH HOLE

AND PUSHED TO RELEASE CORNER
LOCKING TAB
9. While holding the locking tab pressed, pull out on the outer long cover until the corner piece comes
out of the short end cover as shown in Figure 8‐37 on page 133. This may take a little force because the
corner piece may fit tightly into the end panel.
Note: Be careful not to pull the long panel out so much that the corner piece on the other end becomes damaged. The plastic
corner pieces are flexible, but have their limits.
10. Repeat Step 7 on page 132 to Step 9 on page 133 to free the corner piece on the other end of the long
cover from the other end panel.
11. Repeat Step 7 on page 132 to Step 10 on page 133 for the other 4 tiers of panels.
Figure 8-37: Long and Short Panels Removal
OUTER LONG COVER
END PANEL
CORNER LOCKING TAB
8.2.2 Installing the Lower Telescoping Covers

1. Starting with the smallest short and long panels, install corner brackets connecting each set of short
and long panels. Brackets snap into place on each panel. Build panels up so that all five tiers are
positioned around patient support, from the smallest to the largest.
2. Install six screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing top long panel cover brackets to patient
support subframe. Refer to Figure 8‐36 on page 132.
3. Install LH, RH, and rear lower subframe covers. Refer to “Standard / Bariatric Subframe Cover
Removal” on page 106.
Section 9
Section 9 Power Panel Removal / Replacement Procedure
The power panel is mounted horizontally to the patient support base, behind the couch control board.
Estimated Time: 30 minutes
Tools Required: FE Tool Kit
9.1 Removal
1. Place the patient support covers into the service position. Refer to “Placing Lower Covers into the
Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 70.
WARNING: INSTALL the vertical safety support brace whenever personnel are working under the table.
failure to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
2. Install the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure “Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on
page 80.
WARNING: TURN OFF POWER TO THE PATIENT SUPPORT before servicing. hazardous voltages ARE
inside. failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 9 Power Panel Removal /
4. Tag and disconnect all cable connections to the power panel except J724 (see Figure 9‐1). Remove
cable ties as necessary.
5. Remove four screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the power panel to frame base (see
Figure 9‐1).
6. Disconnect J701 and J702 from the control board to allow the power panel to be lifted (see Figure 9‐1).
7. Lift the power panel to access the screws on connector J724 and disconnect it (see Figure 9‐1).
8. Remove the power panel.
Figure 9-1: Power Panel Location
CONNECTORS J724 CONNECTORS J701 & 702
9.2 Installation
1. Orient the power panel as shown in Figure 9‐1 on page 137 in the support base and attach connector
J724 (see Figure 9‐1 on page 137).
2. Attach the power panel to the frame base with four screws, lock washers, and flat washers.
3. Connect J701 and J702 to the control board (see Figure 9‐1 on page 137).
4. Connect all the other cables to power panel and tie the cables in place.
5. Remove the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure “Removing the Vertical Safety Support” on
page 83.
6. Take patient support covers out of service position. Refer to “Taking Patient Support Covers out of
Service Position” on page 85.
Section 10
Section 10 Power Supply Removal / Replacement Procedure
The power supply is mounted horizontally to the patient support base, on the RH side.
10.1 Removal
1. Place the patient support panel covers into the service position. Refer to “Placing Lower Covers into
the Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 70.
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 10 Power Supply
4. Tag and disconnect all cable connections to the power supply. Remove ty‐wraps as necessary. Refer to
5. Remove four screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the power supply cover, and remove
cover. Remove four standoffs and remove power supply board.
Figure 10-1: Power Supply
10.2 Installation
1. Orient the power supply board as shown in Figure 10‐1 on page 140. Place the power supply board on
the frame base and install the four standoffs. Install power supply cover with four screws, lock
washers, and flat washers.
2. Connect cables to power supply and ty‐wrap cables.
page 83.
4. Take patient support panel covers out of service position. Refer to “Taking Patient Support Covers out
of Service Position” on page 85.
Section 11
Section 11 Inverter Panel Removal / Replacement Procedure
The inverter panel is located in the RH rear corner of the patient support, next to the vertical drive motor.
The entire assembly is encased in a clear plastic cover.
For newer model patient supports equipped with vertical motor inverter modules, refer to the Vertical
Motor Inverter Module Replacement on page 156.
11.1 Removal
1. Place the patient support panel covers into service position. Refer to “Placing Lower Covers into the
page 80.
If the patient support cannot be raised to install the vertical safety support, refer to the section
Servicing the Patient Support when it Cannot be Driven Vertically on page 87.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 11 Inverter Panel
WARNING: TURN POWER TO THE PATIENT SUPPORT OFF before servicing. Hazardous voltages ARE
inside. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
page 36 or “Brilliance iCT System Power Down/Power Up” on page 49.
4. Remove 2 attaching screws and remove the inverter cover (see Figure 11‐1).
Figure 11-1: Inverter Cover

INVERTER COVER SCREWS
5. Disconnect the motor power leads U, V, and W from inverter panel connectors. Refer to Figure 11‐2 on
page 143.
Figure 11-2: Motor Wiring Connections on Inverter Panel

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVERTER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
6. Disconnect the motor ground wire (green/yellow) from the ground terminal on the back of the
inverter chassis
(see Figure 11‐3). Leave the nut off this terminal because other grounds will need to be removed.
7. Disconnect connector P771 (see Figure 11‐3).
8. Disconnect encoder cable connector J778 (see Figure 11‐3).
Figure 11-3: Left Head‐End Panel Connectors

CONNECTOR P771 ENCODER CONNECTOR J778
GROUND TERMINAL
9. Disconnect the brake connector P775 (see Figure 11‐4).
10. Disconnect connector J759 (see Figure 11‐4).
Figure 11-4: Left Foot‐End Panel Connectors
BRAKE CONNECTOR P775
CONNECTOR J759
11. Disconnect connector P738 on the head‐end of the inverter panel (see Figure 11‐5).
Figure 11-5: Connectors on Head‐End of Inverter Panel
CONNECTOR P738
12. Disconnect connector P747 on the RH side of the inverter panel (see Figure 11‐6).

13. Remove the ground wires of the disconnected cables from the ground terminal (see Figure 11‐3 on
page 144).
Figure 11-6: Connectors RH Side of the Inverter Panel
CONNECTOR P/J747
14. Remove four screws and lock washers securing the inverter panel to mounting bracket, and remove
inverter panel. Refer to Figure 11‐7 on page 149.
11.2 Installation
1. Position the inverter panel into the table. Maneuver the assembly by grasping only the sheet metal
brackets ‐ do not apply pressure to any PC Board mounted components.
2. Apply Loctite #222 to the 4 screws and install them with flatwashers and lock washers to mount the
inverter panel to the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 11‐7 on page 149.
3. Torque the 4 screws to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Figure 11-7: Location of Screws Securing Inverter Panel to Mounting Bracket
INVERTER PANEL MOUNTING SCREWS
4. Connect connector P747 to J747 on the RH side of the inverter panel (see Figure 11‐8).
CONNECTOR P/J747
5. Connect connector P738 on the head‐end of the inverter panel (see Figure 11‐9).
Figure 11-9: Connectors on Head‐End of Inverter Panel
CONNECTOR P738
6. Connect the brake connector P775 (see Figure 11‐10).
7. Connect connector J759 (see Figure 11‐10).
Figure 11-10: Left Foot‐End Panel Connectors
CONNECTOR J759
8. Connect the motor power leads U, V, and W to the inverter panel connectors. Refer to Figure 11‐11 on
page 153.

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVERTER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
9. Connect the motor ground wire (green/yellow) to the ground terminal on the back of the inverter
chassis
(see Figure 11‐12). Tighten the terminal nut to 6 in‐lbs (0.6 N‐m).
10. Reconnect the other cable ground wires to the ground terminal.
11. Connect connector P771 (see Figure 11‐12).
12. Connect encoder connector J778 (see Figure 11‐12).
Figure 11-12: Left Head‐End Panel Connectors

GROUND TERMINAL
13. Install the inverter cover and attach it with the two screws with flatwashers and lock‐washers (see
Figure 11‐13 on page 155).
14. Connect cables to inverter panel and ty‐wrap cables.
page 83.
17. Power up the system and verify that it operates properly.
Section 12
Section 12 Vertical Motor Inverter Module Replacement
The vertical motor inverter is located in the RH rear corner of the patient support, next to the vertical
drive motor. The entire assembly is encased in a perforated metal cover (Figure 12‐2).
• This section is for replacing vertical motor inverter modules on newer model patient supports
(Figure 12‐1).
• For earlier model patient supports equipped with inverter panels refer to the Inverter Panel Removal
/ Replacement Procedure on page 141.
12.0.1 Tools Required:

• FE Tool Kit
Figure 12-1: Vertical Drive Assemblies
Inverter Panel Used in Earlier Models Vertical Motor Inverter Used in Newer Models
(cover removed) (cover removed)
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 12 Vertical Motor
12.1 Removing the Inverter
Note: The vertical inverter is replaced as complete assembly consisting of the mounting plate with the inverter board,
vertical monitor board, and power relay mounted and connected.
1. Place the patient support panel covers into service position. Refer to Placing the Covers into the
Service Position on page 70.
If the patient support cannot be raised to install the vertical safety support, refer to the section
Servicing the Patient Support when it Cannot be Driven Vertically on page 87.
WARNING: The vertical safety support brace must be installed whenever personnel are working under
the table. Failure to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
2. Install the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure Installing the Vertical Safety Support on
page 80.
WARNING: Turn off power supplies before servicing. Hazardous voltages are inside. Failure to do so may
3. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to “System Shutdown and Power Down” on page 36.
4. Remove 2 attaching screws and remove the vertical motor inverter cover (see Figure 12‐2).
Figure 12-2: Vertical Motor Inverter Cover Screws
VERTICAL MOTOR INVERTER

COVER SCREWS
5. Disconnect motor power connector J790 (Figure 12‐3).
6. Disconnect the brake connector P775 (Figure 12‐3).
7. Disconnect connector J759 (Figure 12‐3).
Figure 12-3: Vertical Monitor Board and Motor Connections
CONNECTOR J759
MOTOR POWER
CONNECTOR J790
inverter chassis (see Figure 12‐4). Leave the nut off this terminal because other grounds will need to
be removed.
9. Disconnect connector P771 (see Figure 12‐4).
10. Disconnect encoder cable connector J778 (see Figure 12‐4).
11. Disconnect connector P738 on the vertical monitor board (see Figure 12‐4).
Figure 12-4: Vertical Monitor Board and Ground Connections
CONNECTOR P771 THERMAL SWITCH CONNECTOR P736

CONNECTOR P1
GROUND
TERMINAL
CONNECTOR P738
ENCODER CONNECTOR J778
14. Disconnect connector P747 on the RH side of the inverter (see Figure 12‐5).

15. Remove the ground wires of the disconnected cables from the ground terminal (see Figure 12‐4).
Figure 12-5: Vertical Power Cable on RH Side of the Motor Inverter
VERTICAL POWER
CONNECTOR P747
16. Remove four screws and lock washers securing the inverter panel assembly to the base mounting
bracket, and remove the panel (Figure 12‐6).
Figure 12-6: Location of Screws Securing the Inverter Panel to the Support Base Mounting Bracket
12.2 Installing the Inverter

1. Position the inverter panel into the table. Maneuver the assembly by grasping only the sheet metal
brackets ‐ do not apply pressure to the mounted circuit board.
2. Apply Loctite #222 to the 4 screws and install them with flatwashers and lock washers to mount the
inverter panel to the mounting bracket. Refer to Figure 12‐7.
3. Torque the 4 screws to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Figure 12-7: Location of Screws Securing Inverter Panel to Mounting Bracket
4. Connect power connector P747 to J747 on the RH side of the inverter panel (see Figure 12‐8).
VERTICAL POWER
CONNECTOR P/J747
5. Connect connector P771 (see Figure 12‐9).
6. Connect connector P1 to the vertical monitor board (see Figure 12‐9).
7. Connect encoder connector J778 (see Figure 12‐9).
10. Reconnect the other cable ground wires to the ground terminal (see Figure 12‐9).
Figure 12-9: Connectors on Vertical Monitor Board

CONNECTOR P771 THERMAL SWITCH CONNECTOR P736
CONNECTOR P1
GROUND
TERMINAL
11. Connect the motor ground wire (green with a yellow stripe) to the ground terminal on the back of the
inverter chassis (see Figure 12‐9). Tighten the terminal nut to 6 in‐lbs (0.6 N‐m).
12. Connect the brake connector P775 (see Figure 12‐10).
13. Connect connector J759 (see Figure 12‐10).
14. Connect the motor power connector J790 (see Figure 12‐10).
Figure 12-10: Vertical Monitor Board and Motor Connectors
CONNECTOR J759
MOTOR POWER
CONNECTOR J790
15. Install the inverter cover and attach it with 2 screws with flatwashers and lockwashers (see Figure 12‐

11).
16. Remove the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure Installing the Vertical Safety Support on
page 80.
17. Take patient support lower covers out of the service position. Refer to Taking Patient Support Covers
out of Service Position on page 85.
18. Power up the system and verify that it operates properly.
VERTICAL MOTOR INVERTER

COVER SCREWS
Section 13
Section 13 Couch Control Board Removal / Replacement Procedure
The couch control board is mounted vertically to the patient support base.
13.1 Removal
1. Make sure that you have a current valid backup of the NVRAM for this PCB before proceeding. If you
do not have one, try to create one before beginning the replacement. Refer to the appropriate
hardware programming manual.
Note: Be aware that a backup of the NVRAM on a failed control board may be corrupt.
1. Place the patient support panel covers into service position. Refer to “Placing Lower Covers into the
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 13 Couch Control Board
4. Tag and disconnect all cable connections to the couch control board. Refer to Figure 13‐1 on page 169.

5. Remove nylon “buttons” covering the three screw holes on the bottom of the frame. Remove three
screws and lock washers securing the couch control board to base of frame, and remove board.
Figure 13-1: Couch Control Board Location
Couch Control Board
Location of Attaching Hardware
13.2 Installation
1. Install the couch control board to the base of frame with three screws and lock washers. Orient the
board as shown in Figure 13‐1 on page 169.
2. Install the nylon “buttons” covering the screw holes.
3. Connect cables to couch control board. Torque the connector screws to 3 in‐lbs (0.3 N‐m).
4. Program the CLPD devices on the board according to the hardware (JTAG) programming manual for
your system and software version.
When instructed in the procedure, turn ON power to the patient support. Refer to the applicable
System Power Up/Power Down Procedure, either “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
Power Down/Power Up” on page 36 or “Brilliance iCT System Power Down/Power Up” on page 49.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 13 Couch Control Board
WARNING: hazardous voltages WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE PATIENT SUPPORT. STAY CLEAR OF ALL
POWERED ITEMS. failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
5. When programming procedure is completed, turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to the
applicable System Power Up/Power Down Procedure, either “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual
v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on page 36 or “Brilliance iCT System Power Down/Power
Up” on page 49.
6. Verify all LEDs are out on Couch Control Board.
7. Remove the JTAG programming connector.
8. Turn power ON to the patient support. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down
page 83.
11. Perform vertical and horizontal couch calibration according to the applicable Brilliance CT
Calibration manual.
Section 14
Section 14 Couch CPM Board Removal / Replacement Procedure
Figure14-1: CPM Board
Estimate Time: 30 minutes
14.1 Removal
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 14 Couch CPM Board
4. The Couch CPM is located on the Couch Control Board, which is in the lower left hand side of the
patient support as shown in Figure 14‐2 on page 173.
5. Verify all LEDs on the control board are out.
!
CAUTION: Observe proper electrostatic procedures when handling electronic PC boards. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the board.
!
CAUTION: Do not over-flex CPM board during removal. Remove board using even pressure on both
sides.
6. Remove the four screws holding the old CPM and carefully remove the board.
Figure14-2: CPM Board Location on Couch Control Board
14.2 Installation
!
CAUTION: Observe proper electrostatic procedures when handling electronic PC boards. Failure to
comply may result in damage to the board.
!
CAUTION: Do not over-flex CPM board during installation. Install board using even pressure on both
sides.
1. Carefully install the new CPM board. Secure with the four screws removed earlier.
WARNING: STAY CLEAR OF ALL POWERED ITEMS. hazardous voltages WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE
PATIENT SUPPORT. failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
!
CAUTION: Ensure the CPM board NVRAM is erased and updated with new values. The CPM NVRAM
contains Calibration and/or I/O parameters that are specific to the scanner. Using the
system with incorrect CPM board NVRAM values may cause improper system operation and/
or equipment damage.
3. Verify the CPM firmware and update its boot and application flash according to the procedure in the
applicable Brilliance hardware (JTAG) programming manual.
page 83.
6. Perform the Vertical Calibration procedure according to the applicable Brilliance CT Calibration
manual.
7. Backup NVRAM after calibration. Refer to the applicable Brilliance CT Software installation manual
for instructions.
Section 15
Section 15 ACS Controller Removal / Replacement Procedure
This procedure is for replacing the ACS motor controller (Figure 15‐1). For replacing an AMC horizontal
motor controller, refer to AMC Horizontal Motor Controller Replacement Procedure on page 180.
Figure 15-1: ACS Controller
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit,
• ACS Software Tools Kit, p/n 4535 670 26041
(consists of ACS software tools CD and
null modem serial cable)
15.1 Removal
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 15 ACS Controller
WARNING: TURN POWER TO THE PATIENT SUPPORT OFF before servicing. Hazardous voltages are
inside. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
4. Label and disconnect all of the cables leading to the ACS (see Figure 15‐2). As shown in Figure 15‐2 on

page 178, bariatric couches have a circuit board plugged into J3.
5. Support the ACS and remove the two nuts holding it to the patient support (see Figure 15‐2).
6. On bariatric units, remove the circuit board plugged into J3 (see Figure 15‐2). This board will does not
come with the replacement ACS and must be installed on the new unit.
Figure 15-2: ACS Mounting and J1 Serial Connection
Remove this nut, and nut from Connector J1 Remove and save Circuit board

other side, to remove ACS. (Connect laptop here for loading plugged into J3 on Bariatric units
ACS Software Update)
Standard Couch ACS Bariatric Couch Added Circuit Board on ACS
15.2 Installation
1. On bariatric units, plug the circuit board into J3 (see Figure 15‐2 on page 178).
2. Install the new ACS and secure it with the two nuts (see Figure 15‐2 on page 178).
3. Attach all of the cables removed earlier.
Note: Replacement ACS controllers are pre‐programmed and should not require reprogramming.
page 83.
7. Put patient support and gantry back in normal mode and verify operation.
Section 16
Section 16 AMC Horizontal Motor Controller Replacement Procedure
This procedure is for replacing the AMC motor controller (Figure 16‐1). For replacing an ACS motor
controller (Figure 16‐1) refer to the ACS Controller Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 176.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit,
Figure 16-1: ACS and AMC Horizontal Motor Controllers (back views)
ACS Controller AMC Controller
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 16 AMC Horizontal
16.1 Removing the Controller

1. Place the patient support covers into the service position. Refer to Placing Lower Covers into the
Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support on page 70.
!
WARNING: The vertical safety support brace must be installed whenever personnel are working under
the table. Failure to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
2. Install the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure Installing the Vertical Safety Support on
page 80.
WARNING: Disconnect power supplies before servicing. Hazardous voltages inside. Failure to do so may
3. Turn OFF power to the patient support (see Removing Table Power on page 40).
4. Label and disconnect all of the cables leading to the AMC (see Figure 16‐2).
5. Support the AMC and remove the two nuts holding it to the patient support (see Figure 16‐2).
6. Remove the AMC controller.
Figure 16-2: AMC Mounting and Cabling
Disconnect Cables Remove this nut, and the nut on

the other side of the AMC.
16.2 Installing the Controller

1. Set the DIP switches on the AMC as follows:
• For standard patient supports, set all switches OFF (Figure 16‐3).
• For bariatric patient supports, set switches 1 and 2 to ON and all other switches to OFF (Figure 16‐3).
• For extended patient supports, set switch 3 to ON and all other switches to OFF (Figure 16‐3)
Figure 16-3: AMC Controller Switch Settings
Standard Support - All Switches OFF Bariatric Support - Switches 1 and 2 ON
Extended Support - Switch 3 ON
2. Install the new AMC and secure it with the two nuts (see Figure 16‐2).
3. Attach all of the cables removed earlier.
Note: Replacement AMC controllers are pre‐programmed and should not require reprogramming.
4. Turn power ON to the patient support (see System Power Up on page 41).
5. Remove the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure Removing the Vertical Safety Support on
page 83.
6. Take patient support panel covers out of service position. Refer to Taking Patient Support Covers out
of Service Position on page 85.
7. Put patient support and gantry back in normal mode and verify operation.
Section 17
Section 17 Footswitch Tape Switches Removal / Replacement
Procedure
17.1 Removal
1. Place the patient support panel covers into the service position. Refer to “Placing Lower Covers into
the Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 70.
page 80.
WARNING: TURN POWER TO THE PATIENT SUPPORT OFF before servicing. hazardous voltages ARE
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 17 Footswitch Tape
WARNING: Take appropriate actions against exposure to blood-borne pathogens when handling parts
that may have come into contact with patients. There is danger of becoming infected from
blood-borne pathogens. Exposure to blood borne pathogens may result in serious personnel
injury or death.
4. Remove the four screws on the outer footswitch cover and remove cover. Refer to Figure on page 187.

5. Disconnect tape switch cable connection.
6. Peel tape switches and double sided tape backing from footswitch inner assembly.
Figure 17-1: Footswitch Tape Switches
Tape Switches (4) Total
Screws to Remove
(4). One in each
corner of the
Footswitch.
17.2 Installation
1. Clean top of the two long returns where tape switches are to be placed with alcohol.
2. Adhere a strip of double sided tape to the bottom of each tape switch, peel the backing from the tape,
and secure the switches to the top returns.
3. Connect tape switch cable.
4. Position foot switch outer cover over inner cover and secure with four screws.
page 83.
Section 18
Section 18 Vertical Drive Motor & Encoder Belt Removal/
Replacement
This procedure is used to remove and replace the patient support vertical drive motor and for replacing
the vertical encoder belt with a continuous belt. The belt kit includes 3 O‐ring belts (453567463821) and 2
plastic wire clips (4535 674 46591).
If there are spare vertical encoder belts in place as shown in Figure 18‐9 on page 198, go to Installing the
Encoder Belt on page 206 for instructions on installing a new belt.
Tools Required:
• FSE tool kit
• Loctite #242
• 5/32 in. socket hex key (to torque motor bolts)
• Torque wrench for 15 in‐lbs (1.70 N‐m)
• 0.030 in. (0.8 mm) feeler gauge
Estimated Time: 2 hours
18.1 Removing the Vertical Drive Motor

1. Place the patient support covers into the service position. Refer to Placing the Covers into the Service
Position on page 70.
page 80.
If the patient support cannot be raised to install the vertical safety support, refer to the section (see
‘Servicing the Patient Support when it Cannot be Driven Vertically on page 87).
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 18 Vertical Drive Motor
WARNING: Turn off power supplies before servicing. Hazardous voltages are inside. Failure to do so may
page 191.
inverter chassis.

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVERTER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
7. Disconnect the brake connector J775 (see Figure 18‐3).
Figure 18-3: Vertical Brake Connector
BRAKE CONNECTOR J775
8. Remove the 2 mounting screws from the encoder bracket and remove the vertical encoder and
bracket assembly (see Figure 18‐4).
Figure 18-4: Vertical Encoder Mounting
REMOVE 2 VERTICAL ENCODER

MOUNTING SCREWS
!
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the set screws in the motor mounting plate (see Figure 18-5). The
set screws are factory adjusted to align the mounting plate and cannot be field adjusted.
Failure to comply may cause misalignment and serious damage to the motor and drive
mechanism.
Do not remove the motor mounting plate from the patient support (see Figure 18-5). The
mounting plate is factory aligned and cannot be field aligned. Failure to comply may cause
misalignment and serious damage to the motor and drive mechanism.
Figure 18-5: Vertical Motor Mounting

DO NOT TURN THE DO NOT REMOVE THE DO NOT TURN THE
MOUNTING PLATE MOUNTING PLATE MOUNTING PLATE
SETSCREWS SETSCREWS
9. Remove the 4 motor mounting bolts indicated in Figure 18‐6.

DO NOT TURN MOTOR MOUNTING DO NOT TURN
MOUNTING PLATE BOLTS MOUNTING PLATE
SETSCREWS SETSCREWS
WARNING: Make sure that the vertical safety support is correctly installed before removing the vertical
drive motor to prevent the support top from dropping. When the vertical motor is removed,
the patient support vertical drive is uncontrolled and free to fall quickly. Failure to comply
may result in serious injury or death to service personnel.
10. Grasp the vertical motor, rotate it slightly away from the frame, slide it to the rear of the patient
support until the coupling disengages, and remove the motor. See Figure 18‐7 on page 196.
Figure 18-7: Removing the Vertical Drive Motor
11. Loosen the set screw on the motor coupling and remove the coupling from the shaft. See Figure 18‐8

on page 197.
Figure 18-8: Coupling Exploded View
VERTICAL BRAKE
VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR
REMOVE
MOUNTING
PLATE
SHAFT KEYS
MOTOR
COUPLING
BALLSCREW COUPLING
ENCODER
PLASTIC SAFETY
RING PULLEY BEARING
SET SCREW
PLASTIC INSERT
BALLSCREW DRIVE
C0861A
18.2 Vertical Drive Motor and Encoder Belt Installation

18.2.1 Installing Spare Encoder Belts
1. If not already installed, install 3 new continuous vertical encoder drive belts (O‐rings) from the
encoder belt kit as follows: If the spare belts are already installed as shown in Figure 18‐9 on page 198,
continue with the following procedure Installing the Vertical Drive Motor on page 199.
a. Attach the 2 extra belts with the 2 plastic wire clips as shown in Figure 18‐9 on page 198 using the
existing fasteners in the base frame assembly.
b. Install the third O‐ring over the shaft, but do not attach the third one in the wire clips. This will be
installed later to drive the Encoder assembly.
Figure 18-9: Securing Spare Encoder Belts

INSTALL 2 BELTS IN WIRE CLIPS AND
ATTACH WITH EXISTING SCREWS
18.3 Installing the Vertical Drive Motor

1. If the replacement motor came with a mounting plate attached, unbolt the motor from the
mounting plate and discard the plate (see Figure 18‐8 on page 197).
Note: Do not attempt to replace the mounting plate installed on the table since the one installed on the table is factory
aligned using a special tool which is not available to the field and there is not a field procedure for aligning the motor
and plate.
2. Slide the encoder pulley onto the motor shaft with the grooved end of the pulley next to the coupling
(see Figure 18‐13 on page 203). Do not tighten the pulley set screw at this time.
3. Install the key into the motor shaft slot (see Figure 18‐10 on page 199).
4. Slide the motor coupling onto the motor shaft (see Figure 18‐10 on page 199). Do not tighten the
motor coupling set screw at this time.
5. Place the plastic insert inside the jaw of the ballscrew shaft coupling (see Figure 18‐10 on page 199).
Figure 18-10: Coupling Exploded View
VERTICAL BRAKE
VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR
REMOVE MOUNTING
PLATEREMOVE
FROM THE
MOUNTING
NEW MOTOR
PLATE WITH
(IF IT COMES
ONE) SHAFT KEYS
MOTOR
COUPLING
BALLSCREW COUPLING
ENCODER
PLASTIC SAFETY
RING PULLEY BEARING
SET SCREW
PLASTIC INSERT
BALLSCREW DRIVE
C0861A
6. Attempt to place the motor into position (see Figure 18‐11). If the coupling on the motor is not
positioned so that it can be engaged to the coupling on the ball screw shaft, the brake will need to be
removed so that the motor shaft can be rotated into alignment.
To rotate the motor shaft:
a. Remove the upper part of the brake according to the procedure “Vertical Brake Removal /
Replacement” on page 210.
b. Rotate the motor until the setscrew on the motor coupling is accessible from the left side of the
table and so that the motor coupling will engage the ball screw shaft coupling.
Figure 18-11: Installing the Vertical Drive Motor
7. Place the motor into position (see Figure 18‐11 on page 201) and install the 4, #10‐32 x 3/4” SHCS

motor mounting screws with flat washers and lockwashers (see Figure 18‐12).
8. Make sure that the coupling on the motor is vertically centered with the coupling on the ball screw
(even on top) and torque the motor mounting screws to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m) (5/32 in. hex key socket).
9. Remove the motor coupling setscrew, apply Loctite #222, reinsert the setscrew, and tighten it.
!
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the set screws in the motor mounting plate. The set screws are
factory adjusted. Failure to comply may cause misalignment and serious damage to the
motor and drive mechanism.

SETSCREWS SETSCREWS
10. On the motor shaft, slide the motor coupling along the shaft until there is a 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8
mm) gap between the motor coupling and the ballscrew coupling. One way to check this gap would
be with a 0.030 in. or a 0.8 mm feeler gauge Refer to Figure 18‐13.
11. Tighten the set screw (1/8 in. hex key) to secure the motor coupling to the motor shaft.
12. Slide the encoder drive pulley up against the coupling and tighten the setscrew (3/32 in. hex key).
13. If the brake was removed, reinstall the brake according to the procedure “Vertical Brake Removal /
Figure 18-13: Coupling Gap
0.030 in. (0.8 mm) GAP ENCODER DRIVE PULLEY
14. Connect the brake connector J775 (see Figure 18‐14).
15. Connect the motor power leads U, V, and W to the inverter panel connectors. Refer to Figure 18‐15.

chassis. Tighten the terminal nut to 6 in‐lbs (0.6 N‐m).

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVERTER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
18.3.1 Installing the Encoder Belt

1. If the encoder bracket was removed, place the encoder bracket in position. If there are no lockwashers
apply Loctite # 222 to the 2 mounting screws and attach the bracket (see Figure 18‐16 on page 207).
Leave the screws just loose enough to allow the bracket to be moved.
2. If the encoder and bracket is in place, loosen the 2 encoder mounting screws (see Figure 18‐16)
enough so that the bracket can be moved.
3. Take a piece of string or wire that is flexible but not elastic and about 1/8” (~3 mm) cross‐sectional
diameter. Cut it a length of 265 mm (10‐7/16 in.) (or mark it at that length).
4. Loop the string or wire around the vertical motor coupling and the encoder pulleys as shown in
Figure 18‐16.
5. Move the encoder bracket so that distance around the 2 pulleys indicated by the string or wire is 265
mm and tighten the encoder bracket mounting screws (see Figure 18‐16). Check that the bracket did
not move when the screws were tightened. When the position is correct, torque the bracket screws to
15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Figure 18-16: Using the String or Wire to Determine the Encoder Bracket Position
MARK AT 265 MM
LOOP WIRE AROUND MOTOR VERTICAL ENCODER

AND ENCODER PULLEYS MOUNTING SCREWS
6. If an installed spare encoder belt is to be used, remove the clamp screws, remove an encoder belt and
reinstall the clamps and screws (see Figure 18‐9 on page 198).
7. Clean the motor pulley, the encoder pulley, and the belt to remove any lubricants.
8. Place the encoder drive belt around the motor pulley and around the encoder pulley (see Figure 18‐
17).
Figure 18-17: Vertical Encoder Belt Installed
LOOP BELT AROUND MOTOR AND

ENCODER PULLEYS
WARNING: Stay clear of all powered items when operating or working on equipment with covers
removed. Dangerous voltages are exposed when the gantry covers are removed. Accidental
contact with these voltages may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
9. Apply power to patient support. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down Procedure,
either “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on page 36 or
“Brilliance iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up” on page 48.
!
WARNING: Do not attempt to lower the patient support with the vertical support brace in place.
Lowering the patient support with the vertical support brace in place will damage the
ballscrew drive and may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
!
WARNING: Keep equipment and personnel away from the mechanical action of the scissor-action lift
10. Remove the vertical support brace and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor. Refer to the
procedure (see ‘Removing the Vertical Safety Support on page 83).
11. Secure the brace cable with a short tie‐wrap fed through the mount on the side of the support brace
holder.
12. Raise and lower the patient support to verify operation of the motor.
13. Watch the vertical encoder belt while stopping and starting the motor to see if slippage is evident. If it
is slipping perform the following:
a. Install the vertical safety support (see ‘Installing the Vertical Safety Support on page 80).
b. Loosen the encoder bracket mounting screws.
c. Move the encoder bracket a few millimeters to tighten the belt, and retighten the screws.
d. Repeat this as necessary until the belt is not slipping.
e. When the position is correct, torque the bracket screws to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
f. Remove the vertical support brace and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor (see (see
‘Removing the Vertical Safety Support on page 83)).
14. Take the patient support panel covers out of service position. Refer to Taking Patient Support Covers
Section 19
Section 19 Vertical Brake Removal / Replacement
Tools Required:
• FSE Tool Kit
• Torque wrench kit TC 327 P/N 4535 675 28581
(for 7 lb.‐in (0.8 N‐m), 10 lb.‐in (1.1 N‐m), and 21.2 lb.‐in (2.4 N‐m))
Material Required: See the scenarios below to determine if FCO 72800495 needs to be performed.
If FCO 72800495 needs to be done you will need:
• Loctite # 222
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Small paper or plastic cup
• Paper towel or disposable rag
• Latex gloves
If FCO 72800495 has already been done, or if the system is newer than the cut‐in serial numbers listed in
the FCO, you will only need:
• Loctite # 222
19.1 Brake Replacement Scenarios

There are three types of brakes that have been used on Brilliance patient supports:
• A Warner brake (WR213A127P1) shown in (see Figure 19‐1 on page 212),
• An Inertia Dynamics Inc. (IDI) brake (1904‐0081) shown in (see Figure 19‐2 on page 212) or
• A Warner ERD5 brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (in kit 4535 674 67771) (shown in Figure 19‐3 on page 214).
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 19 Vertical Brake
Current production supports are equipped with a Warner ERD5 brake. The Warner ERD5 brake (P/N 4535
664 98912) comes in kit 4535 674 67771 which contains the 4535 664 98912 brake and a new shaft key P/N
4535 674 67651.
Before proceeding, determine what will be needed for your patient support from the following options:
19.1.1 Scenario 1:
If you have a Warner brake (WR213A127P1) shown in Figure 19‐1, or an Inertia Dynamics Inc. (IDI) brake
(1904‐0081) shown in Figure 19‐2 replace it with a Warner ERD5 brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (in kit 4535 674
67771).
You will need:
• A Warner ERD5 brake kit P/N 4535 674 67771 and
• A 4598 000 70951 Patient Support Vertical Brake Hub Rework Kit (FCO 72800495)
If you have one of the brakes shown in Figure 19‐1 or (Figure 19‐2):
• Remove the brake according to the procedure “Removing a P/N 4535 664 98911 Brake” on page 214.
This removal procedure is for both types since they are similar.
• Perform the instructions included in the 4598 000 70951 Patient Support Vertical Brake Hub Rework
Kit
• Install a new Warner ERD5 brake (P/N 4535 664 98912) according to the procedure “Installing a
Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
Figure 19-1: Warner WR2 Brake P/N 4535 664 98911 Figure 19-2: IDI Brake P/N 4535 664 98911
19.1.2 Scenario 2:
If you have a Warner ERD5 brake P/N 4535 664 98912 brake (shown in Figure 19‐3 on page 214) look at
the top of the motor housing:
If “FCO 72800495” has been written on top of the motor housing:
• You will only need a Warner ERD5 brake kit P/N 4535 674 67771
If “FCO 72800495” has NOT been written on top of the motor housing, proceed with the disassembly
to determine if an FCO 72800495 Patient Support Vertical Brake Hub Rework Kit is required (P/N 4598
000 70951).
The Sequence for replacing a Warner ERD5 brake is:
• Remove the brake according to the procedure “Removing a Warner ERD5 Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664
98912” on page 219 and
• Check to see if FCO 72800495 has been performed (or if it was done at the factory) (see Step 11 on
page 224). If FCO 72800495 has not been done, perform the FCO using the instructions included in the
4598 000 70951 Patient Support Vertical Brake Hub Rework Kit.
• Install the new brake according to the procedure “Installing a Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535
664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
Note: The red tabs are installed to facilitate assembly and installation. They serve no purpose after the brake is installed.
Figure 19-3: New Warner ERD5 Brake ‐ Philips P/N 4535 664 98912 (Supplied In Kit 4535 674 67771)
LOOK FOR “FCO 72800495”

WRITTEN SOMEWHERE ON HOUSING
19.2 Removing a Vertical Brake

19.2.1 Removing a P/N 4535 664 98911 Brake
This procedure is for removing either a Warner brake (WR213A127P1) shown in Figure 19‐1 on page 212,
or an Inertia Dynamics Inc. (IDI) brake (1904‐0081) shown in Figure 19‐2 on page 212.
2. Remove any items that may be on top of the patient support.
page 80.
WARNING: INSTALL THE vertical SAFETY SUPPORT BRACE BEFORE REMOVING THE VERTICAL BRAKE.
REMOVAL OF THE VERTICAL BRAKE WILL ALLOW THE patient support TOP TO FALL IF THE
vertical SUPPORT IS NOT IN PLACE AND MAY CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONEL INJURY OR
DEATH.
4. Lower the table carefully until the weight of the table is just against the brace.
!
CAUTION: Make sure that the table top weight is firmly supported by the brace so that no more
downward motion is possible. If the upper table weight is not firmly supported by the brace,
the brake may attempt to rotate when the brake mounting screws are removed.
6. Disconnect the vertical brake wiring from the vertical monitor board at connector J775 (see Figure 19‐
4).
Figure 19-4: Connector J775
CONNECTOR J775
!
CAUTION: Hold onto the brake when removing the mounting screws. The brake may attempt to rotate
when the brake mounting screws are removed if the table weight is not firmly supported by
the brace.
7. While firmly holding the brake, remove 4 screws securing the vertical brake to the top of the vertical
drive motor. Refer to Figure 19‐6 on page 217.
8. Remove the vertical brake assembly. Refer to Figure 19‐6 on page 217.
Figure 19-5: Warner WR2 Vertical Brake Mounting
WARNER WR2
VERTICAL BRAKE
REMOVE 4
ATTACHING SCREWS
WITH WASHERS
Figure 19-6: IDI Vertical Brake Mounting
IDI VERTICAL BRAKE
REMOVE 4
ATTACHING SCREWS
9. For Warner brakes loosen the set screw and remove the shaft collar (see Figure 19‐7). (The collar will
not be present for IDI brakes.)
10. Loosen the set screws and remove the brake hub at the top of the motor (see Figure 19‐7).
11. Remove the square key from the motor shaft.
12. Inspect motor output shaft for damage and wear, particularly at the keyway. Replace the motor if the
keyway is damaged or if the hub is not secure with key in place.
13. Perform FCO 72800495 using the instructions included in the Patient Support Vertical Brake Hub
Rework Kit (P/N 4598 000 70951).
14. Install a Warner ERD5 vertical brake P/N 4535 664 98912 according to the procedure “Installing a
Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
Figure 19-7: Shaft Collar and Brake Hub on Vertical Brake Motor Shaft
SHAFT COLLAR
(NOT USED WITH IDI BRAKES)
BRAKE HUB
19.2.2 Removing a Warner ERD5 Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664

98912
This procedure is for removing the Warner ERD5 vertical brake P/N 4535 664 98912 shown in Figure 19‐6
on page 217.
2. Remove any items that may be on top of the patient support.
page 80.
WARNING: INSTALL THE vertical SAFETY SUPPORT BRACE BEFORE REMOVING THE VERTICAL BRAKE.
REMOVAL OF THE VERTICAL BRAKE WILL ALLOW THE patient support TOP TO FALL IF THE
vertical SUPPORT IS NOT IN PLACE AND MAY CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONEL INJURY OR
DEATH.
!
CAUTION: Make sure that the table top weight is firmly supported by the brace so that no more
downward motion is possible. If the upper table weight is not firmly supported by the brace,
the brake rotor may rotate when the brake mounting screws are removed allowing the table
top to move down.
4. Lower the table carefully until the weight of the table is against the brace so that further downward
motion is prevented. Be careful not to lower it so much that it causes stress on table vertical drive
components.
6. Disconnect the vertical brake wiring from the vertical monitor board at connector J775 (see Figure 19‐
8).
Figure 19-8: Connector J775 (applies to all)
CONNECTOR J775
!
CAUTION: The brake rotor may rotate when the brake mounting screws are removed allowing the table
top to come down slightly if the table weight is not firmly supported by the brace.
7. Remove 3 screws attaching the vertical brake to the mounting plate. Refer to Figure 19‐9 on page 221.
8. Remove the vertical brake upper solenoid body. Refer to Figure 19‐9 on page 221.
Figure 19-9: Warner ERD Vertical Brake
REMOVE 3
ATTACHING SCREWS
WARNER ERD
VERTICAL BRAKE
SOLENOID BODY
9. Remove the brake rotor from the spline hub (see Figure 19‐10).
Figure 19-10: Spline Hub On Motor Shaft
SPLINE HUB
BRAKE ROTOR
10. Remove the 4 screws attaching the mounting plate to the motor as shown in Figure 19‐11 on page 223,

and remove the mounting plate.
Figure 19-11: Brake Mounting Plate
REMOVE 4 SCREWS
BRAKE MOUNTING PLATE
11. Determine if FCO 72800495 has been done on the brake or if its equivalent has been done at the
factory:
a. Look at the top of the motor housing: (see Figure 19‐10). If “FCO 72800495” has been written on
top of the motor housing, install the new brake according to the procedure “Installing a Warner
ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
b. If “FCO 72800495” has NOT been written on top of the motor housing:
• Attempt to remove one of the setscrews in the hub (see Figure 19‐12).
• Use a screwdriver to pry up on the hub.
c. If the setscrews can be removed or the hub moves when pried up with a screwdriver, perform
FCO 72800495 using the instructions included in the Patient Support Vertical Brake Hub Rework
Kit (P/N 4598 000 70951).
d. If the setscrews cannot be turned and the hub does not move when pried up with a screwdriver,
leave the hub in place and proceed to “Installing a Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912
(In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
• Once FCO 72800495 has been completed, install the new brake according to the procedure “Installing
a Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
Figure 19-12: Look for FCO Number Written on Motor Housing or Attempt to Remove Hub Setscrew
LOOK FOR FCO 72800495

WRITTEN SOMEWHERE
ON MOTOR HOUSING
ATTEMPT TO REMOVE
SETSCREW
19.3 Installing a Warner ERD Vertical Brake P/N 4535

664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)
1. Clean the motor upper surface from any accumulated brake dust, dirt, oil, or debris.
!
CAUTION: Avoid contaminating the brake rotor and clean brake components. Wear clean examination
gloves when handling the brake rotor and other brake parts. Do not allow any contamination
(dirt, grease, oil, Loctite, cleaning fluid, etc.) to get onto the rotor or other brake
components. Failure to do so may cause improper brake operation.
2. Place the mounting plate on the motor with the machined side (with machining marks) facing up (see
Figure 19‐13).
3. Orient the plate so the brake solenoid mounting screw holes are positioned as shown in Figure 19‐13
on page 227. Verify that when the brake solenoid is mounted the brake leads will exit as shown in
!
CAUTION: Do not install flat washers on the mounting plate screws. They may interfere with the brake
rotor.
4. Apply Loctite # 222 to the 4 screws, install them and tighten them to 10 in‐lb (1.1 N‐m).
Figure 19-13: Brake Mounting Plate Installed

PLATE ORIENTED WITH THIS MOUNTING
HOLE ON THE SIDE OPPOSITE FROM THE
INSTALL 4 SCREWS MOTOR WIRES
5. Clean any Loctite or other contamination off the brake mounting plate surface.
6. Install the rotor onto the spline hub with the longer hub side down as shown in Figure 19‐14 on
page 228. Ensure the rotor moves freely up and down on the spline hub.
7. Apply a small amount of Loctite #222 to the 3 tapped holes in the lower brake plate (see Figure 19‐14).
Figure 19-14: Brake Rotor Installed
SMALL AMOUNT OF LOCTITE

# 222 IN TAPPED HOLES
8. Place the brake assembly on the motor oriented so that the brake lead exits on the same side as the
motor leads as shown in Figure 19‐15 on page 229.
9. Attach the brake with the 3, M4 x 0.7 x 35 mm long screws and lockwashers provided with the brake
and tighten them to 21.2 INCH‐lbs (2.4 N‐m).
10. Remove and discard the three red plastic tabs (see Figure 19‐15).
Figure 19-15: Warner ERD Vertical Brake Mounted

ATTACH BRAKE WITH
3 SCREWS
BRAKE LEAD AND

MOTOR LEADS EXIT
ON SAME SIDE
RED PLASTIC TAB

(1 of 3)
11. Connect the vertical brake wiring to the vertical monitor board at connector J775 (see Figure 19‐16).
Figure 19-16: Connector J775 (applies to all)
CONNECTOR J775
12. Apply power to the system. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down Procedure, either
“Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on page 36 or “Brilliance
iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up” on page 48.
page 83.
14. Test the system:
• Raise and lower the patient support several times and make sure it operates correctly with no brake
squeaks or uneven vertical operation.
• While raising and lowering the patient support, stop the vertical motion several times to test the
brake. Up and down motions should be smooth.
15. Restore the patient support covers from the service position to the normal position. Refer to “Taking
Patient Support Covers out of Service Position” on page 85.
16. Perform a Surview and a complete patient study.
Section 20
Section 20 Vertical Motion Encoder Belt Removal / Replacement
Procedure
Note: To replace the vertical motion encoder belt refer to the procedure “Vertical Drive Motor & Encoder Belt Removal/
The former procedure contained in this section became obsolete and has been removed.
Section 21
Section 21 Vertical Encoder Assembly Removal / Replacement
Procedure
The vertical encoder assembly is mounted on a bracket to the rear of the patient support base, next to the
vertical drive motor. Refer to Figure 21‐1 on page 234
21.1 Removal
1. Place the patient support covers into the service position. Refer to “Placing the Covers into the Service
Position” on page 70.
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 21 Vertical Encoder
4. Disconnect the encoder to vertical monitor board cable L23490 from the vertical encoder. Refer to
5. Remove two screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing vertical encoder bracket to patient
support base. Remove vertical o‐ring belt from encoder pulley, and remove vertical encoder assembly.
Figure 21-1: Vertical Encoder Location
Vertical O‐Ring Belt
Vertical Encoder
Encoder Pulley
Screws to be Removed
21.2 Installation
1. If the encoder bracket was removed, place the encoder bracket in position. If there are no lockwashers
apply Loctite # 222 to the 2 mounting screws and attach the bracket (see Figure 21‐2). Leave the
screws just loose enough to allow the bracket to be moved.
Figure 21‐2.
15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
MARK AT 265 MM
LOOP WIRE AROUND MOTOR

AND ENCODER PULLEYS VERTICAL ENCODER
MOUNTING SCREWS
reinstall the clamps and screws.
7. Place the encoder drive belt around the motor pulley and around the encoder pulley (see Figure 21‐3).
LOOP BELT AROUND

MOTOR AND ENCODER
PULLEYS
WARNING: Stay clear of all powered items when operating or working on equipment with covers
removed. Dangerous voltages are exposed when the gantry covers are removed. Accidental
contact with these voltages may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
8. Apply power to patient support. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down Procedure,
!
WARNING: Do not attempt to lower the patient support with the vertical support brace in place.
Lowering the patient support with the vertical support brace in place will damage the
ballscrew drive and may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
!
WARNING: Keep equipment and personnel away from the mechanical action of the scissor-action lift
procedure “Removing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 83.
holder.
11. Raise and lower the patient support to verify operation of the motor.
12. Watch the vertical encoder belt while stopping and starting the motor to see if slippage is evident. If it
is slipping perform the following:
a. Install the vertical safety support (see “Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 80).
• Loosen the encoder bracket mounting screws.
• Move the encoder bracket a few millimeters to tighten the belt, and retighten the screws.
• Repeat this as necessary until the belt is not slipping.
• When the position is correct, torque the bracket screws to 15 in-lbs (1.7 N-m).
• Remove the vertical support brace and return it to its holder on the face of the scissor (see
“Removing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 83).
Section 22
Section 22 Vertical Transducer Removal / Replacement Procedure
The vertical transducer is mounted to the side of the spring support, located at the gantry side end of the
patient support base.
22.1 Removal
page 80.
4. Disconnect transducer cable (plug P718) from couch control board.
5. Remove transducer string from transducer hook.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 22 Vertical Transducer
6. Remove screw on transducer cover and remove cover.
7. Remove four screws and washers securing vertical transducer to spring support, and remove vertical
transducer from spring support. Refer to Figure 22‐2 on page 242.
Figure 22-1: Vertical Transducer (Cover Removed)
22.1.1 Installation
1. Install the vertical transducer to the spring support with four screws and washers.
2. Position transducer cover over transducer and install screw. Refer to Figure 22‐2.
3. Connect transducer cable (plug P718) to couch control board.
Figure 22-2: Vertical Transducer Cover Installation
4. Slowly raise string from transducer and hook it onto the transducer hook. Refer to Figure 22‐3 on
page 243.
Figure 22-3: Transducer Hook With String Attached
page 83.
8. Perform vertical couch calibration according to the appropriate Brilliance CT calibration manual.
Section 23
Section 23 Vertical Monitor Board Removal / Replacement
Procedure
The vertical monitor board is mounted to the inverter panel mounting bracket, directly behind the vertical
drive motor.
Tools Required: FE Tool Kit, 90 degree #1 Phillips screwdriver
23.1 Removal
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 23 Vertical Monitor
4. Tag and disconnect all cable connections to the vertical monitor board. Remove ty‐wraps as necessary.
5. Remove four screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the vertical monitor board to mounting
bracket, and remove board.
Figure 23-1: Vertical Monitor Board
Vertical Monitor Board Location
Vertical Monitor Board Location
23.2 Installation
1. Install the vertical monitor board to the mounting bracket with four screws, lock washers, and flat
washers.
2. Connect cables to vertical monitor board and ty‐wrap cables.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 23 Vertical Monitor
4. Remove the vertical safety support. Refer to the procedure “Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on
page 80.
Section 24
Section 24 Vertical Up/Down Limit Switches Removal /
Replacement Procedure
There are two sets of vertical UP/DOWN limit switches. One set of two switches is mounted in the middle
of the base, next to the power supply, and the other set is mounted at the rear of the patient support base,
next to the vertical drive motor. Removal / replacement is similar for either set of switches.
Tools Required: FSE Tool Kit
24.1 Removal
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 24 Vertical Up/Down
4. Tag and disconnect wiring leads from switch to be removed. Refer to Figure 24‐1 on page 248.

5. Remove two screws securing switch to frame, and remove switch.
Figure 24-1: Location Of Vertical Up/down Limit Switches
24.2 Installation
1. Install replacement switch to frame with two screws. Loctite and hand torque screws.
2. Connect wiring leads to switch.
page 83.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 24 Vertical Up/Down
6. Perform patient support vertical calibration according to the appropriate Calibration manual.
Section 25
Section 25 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement - Standard
Support
This procedure is used to remove and replace the patient support vertical drive ball screw assembly.
Material Required:
• Ball screw P/N 4535 664 94251 (or ballscrew and key kit 4535 674 83811)
• Areoshell grease #7 (cartridge P/N 4535 663 60971 ‐ included in gantry/couch lubricant kit P/N 4535
670 23141)
• Paper towels
• Never‐Seez Anti‐Seize Compound P/N 4535 661 32521
Suggested Material:
The following items are not required for this procedure; however, on older systems it might be a good
idea to consider replacing them since it would be convenient to replace these items during this procedure
without requiring any additional disassembly
• Encoder drive belt
• 2 Thrust Bearings ‐ P/N 4535 661 38791
• Bearing Lockwasher P/N 4535 664 92371 for (with bendable tabs for bearing spanner locknut)
Tools Required:
• FSE tool kit
• Loctite #242 and #243
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 25 Vertical Drive Ball
• Torque wrench for 15 in‐lbs (170 n‐cm)
• 1‐1/2 in. open‐end wrench or an adjustable wrench capable of opening to 1‐1/2 in.
• 1 in. Spanner wrench (for ballscrew nut)
• Feeler Gauge 0.030 in. (0.8 mm)

page 80.
Note: A plastic inverter cover is shown. Newer patient supports will have metal covers.
Figure 25-1: Inverter Cover (plastic cover shown)
page 253.
inverter chassis.

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVERTER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
8. Remove the 2 mounting screws from the encoder bracket and remove the vertical encoder and
bracket assembly (see Figure 25‐4).
REMOVE 2 VERTICAL
ENCODER MOUNTING
SCREWS
!
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST THE MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE ALIGNMENT SET SCREWS.
THESE SETSCREWS ARE ADJUSTED FOR ALIGNMENT AT THE FACTORY AND FIELD
ALIGNMENT IS NOT SUPPORTED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY CAUSE MISALIGNMENT AND
SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR AND DRIVE MECHANISM.
9. Remove the 4 motor mounting bolts indicated in Figure 25‐5 on page 256.

SETSCREWS SETSCREWS
WARNING: BEFORE REMOVING THE VERTICAL DRIVE MOTOR ENSURE THAT THE VERTICAL safety
SUPPORT IS CORRECTLY INSTALLED TO PREVENT THE SUPPORT TOP FROM DROPPING.
WHEN THE VERTICAL MOTOR IS REMOVED, THE PATIENT SUPPORT vertical drive IS
UNCONTROLLED AND FREE TO FALL QUICKLY. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO SERVICE PERSONNEL.
25.1.1 Removing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew

1. Using a 1‐1/2 in. open‐end wrench or an adjustable wrench, remove the ballscrew nut by turning it
CCW (see Figure 25‐7) until it comes out of the scissor casting.
Figure 25-7: Removing the Ball Screw Nut
2. Loosen the ballscrew coupling setscrew using a 1/8 in. hex key (see Figure 25‐8).
Figure 25-8: Loosening Coupling Setscrew
3. Remove the coupling from the ballscrew. If necessary, use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to
gently tap the coupling off the shaft as shown in Figure 25‐9 on page 260.
Figure 25-9: Removing the Coupling
4. Using a suitable tool, bend up the lock‐ring tab that is bent down into one of the spanner nut slots
Figure 25-10: Releasing Lock Tab

BEND LOCK RING TAB OUT OF
SPANNER NUT SLOT
5. Slide the coupling part‐way onto the shaft. Place a suitable tool into the coupling to hold the ballscrew
from turning and using a spanner wrench or pliers, loosen the retaining nut. (see Figure 25‐11).
6. Remove the coupling and the key from the ballscrew shaft.
7. Remove the nut, lock ring, and the 3 parts of the thrust bearing from the shaft.
Figure 25-11: Removing Locknut
8. Thread the ball nut far enough toward the foot end of the ballscrew to allow the ballscrew to be
pulled out of the rear bearing block and remove the ballscrew assembly as shown in Figure 25‐12 on
page 263.
9. Remove all 3 parts of the thrust bearing from the recess in the head‐end of the bearing block. If the
thrust bearing is to be reused, make sure that no debris gets onto the bearing.
Figure 25-12: Removing the Ballscrew
25.2 Installing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew

1. Check the alignment of the vertical drive ball screw retainer block. Refer to Vertical Drive Ball Screw
Bearing Retainer Alignment Check on page 328.
!
CAUTION: Do not screw the ballscrew nut off the end of the ballscrew or the ball bearings may come
out making it difficult to reassemble.
Note: Wearing gloves is recommended when handling the ballscrew.
2. Thread the ball nut (Figure 25‐7) up the ballscrew until it is about in the middle of the ballscrew.
3. Insert the non‐drive end of the ballscrew through the scissor hole.
4. Apply a coating of Areoshell grease #7 to both sides of the ball bearing cage of the thrust bearing.
Figure 25-13: Ball Bearing Cage Description
BALL BEARING CAGE CLOSED END BALL BEARING CAGE OPEN END
!
CAUTION: It is important to assemble the inner and outer thrust bearings in the correct orientation.
The concave side of each race must face the ball bearing cage.
Figure 25-14: Orientation of Inner and Outer Thrust Bearings in relation to Retainer Block
5. Install the 3 parts of the thrust bearing onto the ballscrew (Figure 25‐15 andFigure 25‐16) as follows:

a. Install race with the smaller inner diameter (ID) with the concave side toward the ball bearing cage,
and the flat side with letters facing away from the retainer block.
Note: The smaller ID race will be snug on the ball screw shaft and the larger ID race will be loose.
b. Install the ball bearing cage with the cage closed end facing away from the retainer block.
c. Install the second race with the larger ID with the concave side toward the ball bearing cage.
Figure 25-15: Inner Thrust Bearing Installed on Ballscrew

FLAT SIDE OF RACE BALL BEARING CAGE FLAT SIDE OF RACE
WITH SMALLER ID WITH LARGER ID
FLAT SIDE
WITH LETTERS
CONCAVE SIDE
Note: Make sure the letters on the race with the smaller ID are facing away from the retainer block.
The ball bearing cage closed end should face away from the retainer block.
The concave side of the race with the larger ID should face away from the retainer block and toward the ball
bearing cage.
LETTERS ON
SMALLER ID
RACE CONCAVE SIDE
OF LARGER ID RACE
BEARING CAGE
CLOSED END
6. Insert the drive end of the ball screw through the bearing block.
7. Apply a coating of Areoshell grease #7 to the ball bearings of the thrust bearing (Figure 25‐13 on
page 264).
8. Install the 3 parts of the thrust bearing onto the ballscrew (Figure 25‐17 and Figure 25‐18) as follows:
a. Install race with the larger ID first with the concave side toward the ball bearing cage.
b. Install the ball bearing cage with the cage closed end facing away from the bearing block.
c. Install the second race with the smaller ID with the concave part toward the ball bearing cage and
the letters facing away from the retainer block.
Figure 25-17: Outer Thrust Bearing Installed on Ballscrew

WITH LARGER ID WITH SMALLER ID
LETTERS
The concave side of the race with the larger ID should face away from the retainer block and toward the ball bearing
cage.
NOTE: ENCODER CABLE SHOWN REMOVED FOR CLARITY

LETTERS ON
SMALLER ID RACE
BEARING CAGE
CLOSED END
CONCAVE SIDE OF LARGER ID RACE
9. Place the lockring over the end of the ballscrew shaft with the lock ring tangs facing the end of the
shaft (see Figure 25‐19). Push it up against the bearing.
10. Screw the spanner nut onto the end of the ballscrew with the tapered end of the nut toward the lock
ring.
Figure 25-19: Lock Ring and Spanner Installed on Ballscrew
LOCK RING SPANNER NUT TAPERED

SIDE TOWARD BEARING
11. Place the key into the shaft keyway
12. Slide the coupling part‐way onto the shaft (see Figure 25‐20).
13. Place suitable tool into the coupling to used to hold the ballscrew from turning (see Figure 25‐20) and
using a spanner wrench or pliers, snugly tighten (do not make too tight) the spanner nut against the
lock ring so that a tang on the lock ring aligns with a notch on the lock ring.
Figure 25-20: Tightening Spanner Nut
14. Bend the lock ring tang down into a spanner nut notch so that it is flush with the spanner nut surface
LOCK RING TANG INTO KEY INSTALLED

SPANNER NUT NOTCH
15. Push the coupling all the way up against the spanner nut. Remove the setscrew, apply Loctite #243,
reinstall it and torque the set screw to 87 in‐lbs (9.8 N‐m).
Figure 25-22: Coupling Installation
COUPLING AGAINST
SPANNER NUT
16. Apply a small amount of Never‐Seez anti‐seize compound onto the threads of the ballscrew nut and
thread it into the scissor slide (see Figure 25‐23).
17. Tighten the nut snugly using a 1‐½” wrench (see Figure 25‐7).

APPLY ANTI-SIEZE COMPOUND
TO NUT THREADS
18. Install 3 new continuous vertical encoder drive belts (O‐rings) from the encoder belt kit as follows:
a) Attach the 2 extra belts with the 2 plastic wire clips as shown in Figure 25-24 on page 275 using the
existing fasteners in the base frame assembly.
• Install the third O-ring over the shaft, but do not attach the third one in the wire clips. This will be
installed later to drive the encoder assembly.
Figure 25-24: Spare Encoder Belts Installed

INSTALL 2 BELTS IN WIRE CLIPS AND
ATTACH WITH EXISTING SCREWS

1. Place the plastic insert inside the jaw of the ballscrew shaft coupling.
2. Attempt to place the motor into position (see Figure 25‐7 on page 258). If the coupling on the motor is
not positioned so that it can be engaged to the coupling on the ball screw shaft, the brake will need to
be removed so that the motor shaft can be rotated into alignment.
a. Remove the upper part of the brake according to the procedure “Installing a Warner ERD Vertical
Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771)” on page 225.
• Rotate the motor until the setscrew on the motor coupling is accessible from the left side of the
3. Place the motor into position (see Figure 25‐7 on page 258) and install the 4 #10‐32 x 3/4” SHCS motor
mounting screws with flat washers and lockwashers (see Figure 25‐5 on page 256).
5. Check that there is a 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm) gap between the motor coupling and the
ballscrew coupling (see Figure 25‐26). One way to check the gap would be with a 0.030 in. (0.8 mm)
feeler gauge.
If the gap is at least 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm), skip to Step 6 on page 278.
If the gap is NOT at least 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm), perform the following:
a. Remove the motor coupling setscrew (1/8 in. hex key), apply Loctite #242, and loosely reinsert the
setscrew.
• Loosen the encoder drive pulley setscrew (3/32 in. hex key).
• Move the coupling on the motor shaft until there is a 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm) gap between
the motor coupling and the ballscrew coupling (see Figure 25‐26).
• Tighten the set screw to secure the motor coupling to the motor shaft.
• Slide the encoder drive pulley up against the coupling and tighten the setscrew (3/32 in. hex key).
0.030 in. (0.8 mm) GAP ENCODER

DRIVE PULLEY
Figure 25‐27.
15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
MARK AT 265 MM

28).
LOOP BELT AROUND

MOTOR AND ENCODER
PULLEYS
12. If the brake was removed, reinstall the brake according to the procedure Installing a Warner ERD
Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771) on page 225.
13. Connect the brake connector J775 (Figure 25‐29).
Figure 25-29: Brake Connector

page 282.
chassis.
16. Apply a coating of Areoshell grease #7 to the threaded portion of the ballscrew, both in front and
behind the nut block.

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVETER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
WARNING: Use extreme caution when operating or working on equipment with covers removed.
Dangerous voltages are exposed when the gantry covers are removed. Accidental contact
with these voltages may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
!
WARNING: Lowering the patient support with the vertical support brace in place will damage the
ballscrew drive. Failure to remove the vertical support brace will result in equipment
damage and/or serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
The scissor-action mechanism is exposed when the patient support telescoping base
covers are removed. Keep equipment and personnel away from the mechanical action of
these parts. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or serious injury
and/or death to service personnel.
procedure Removing the Vertical Safety Support on page 83.
holder.
20. Run the unit up and down to fully work the Grease into the nut block; add grease as necessary to
pack the unit.
21. Raise and lower the patient support to verify that the motor operates properly and that there is no
unusual vibration or noise.
22. Watch the vertical encoder belt while stopping and starting the vertical motor to see if slippage is
evident. If it is slipping perform the following:
a. Install the vertical safety support (see Installing the Vertical Safety Support on page 80).
• When the position is correct, torque the bracket screws to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Removing the Vertical Safety Support on page 83).
Section 26
Section 26 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement -
Extended Support
This procedure is used to remove and replace the long top patient support vertical drive ball screw
assembly.
Material Required:
• Ball screw P/N 4535 664 94251 (or ballscrew and key kit 4535 674 83811)
• Areoshell grease #7 (cartridge P/N 4535 663 60971 ‐ included in gantry/couch lubricant kit P/N 4535
670 23141)
• Paper towels
• Examination Gloves
Suggested Material:
The following items are not required for this procedure; however, on older systems it might be a good
idea to consider replacing them since it would be convenient to replace these items during this procedure
without requiring any additional disassembly
• Encoder drive belt
• 2 Thrust Bearings ‐ P/N 4535 661 38791
• Bearing Lockwasher P/N 4535 664 92371 for (with bendable tabs for bearing spanner locknut)
Tools Required:
• FSE tool kit
• Loctite #222, #242, and #243
• 1 in. Spanner wrench (for ballscrew nut)
• Feeler Gauge 0.030 in. (0.8 mm)

page 80.
WARNING: Turn power to the table off. Hazardous voltages are inside. Failure to do so may result in
3. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
Power Down/Power Up on page 36.

page 288.
inverter chassis.
MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVERTER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
Figure 26-3: Vertical Brake Connector (Extended Patient Support Shown)
8. Loosen the 2 encoder bracket mounting screws and slide the vertical encoder and bracket assembly to
loosen the belt and remove the belt (see Figure 26‐4).
REMOVE 2 VERTICAL
ENCODER MOUNTING
SCREWS
!
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the motor mounting plate screws. The motor mounting plate
screws are factory adjusted and are not field adjustable. Adjusting the screws may cause
misalignment and serious damage to the motor and drive mechanism.
9. Remove the 4 motor mounting bolts indicated in Figure 26‐5 on page 291.

SETSCREWS SETSCREWS
WARNING: Before removing the vertical drive motor ensure that the vertical safety support is correctly
installed to prevent the support top from dropping. When the vertical motor is removed, the
patient support vertical drive is uncontrolled and free to fall quickly. Failure to comply may
result in serious injury or death to service personnel.
26.2 Removing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew

1. Loosen the ballscrew coupling setscrew using a 1/8 in. hex key (see Figure 26‐7).
Figure 26-7: Loosening Coupling Setscrew
2. Remove the coupling from the ballscrew. If necessary, use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to
gently tap the coupling off the shaft as shown in Figure 26‐8 on page 294.
Figure 26-8: Removing the Coupling
3. Using a suitable tool, bend up the lock‐ring tab that is bent down into one of the spanner nut slots
Figure 26-9: Releasing Lock Tab

BEND LOCK RING TAB OUT OF
SPANNER NUT SLOT
4. Slide the coupling part‐way onto the shaft. Place a suitable tool into the coupling to hold the ballscrew
from turning and using a spanner wrench or pliers, loosen the retaining nut. (see Figure 26‐10).
5. Remove the coupling and the key from the ballscrew shaft.
6. Remove the nut, lock ring, and the 3 parts of the thrust bearing from the shaft.
Figure 26-10: Removing Locknut
LOOSEN RETAINING NUT SLIDE COUPLING PARTWAY SCREWDRIVER TO KEEP

WITH PLIERS ONTO SHAFT BALLSCREW FROM TURNING
7. Remove the 2 SHCS holding the switch plate (5/32” hex key) and remove the switch plate (see
Figure 26‐11). Set the switch and plate assembly off to the side out of the way.
8. Remove the 3 SHCS holding the lock block retainer plate (5/32” hex key) and remove it (see Figure 26‐
11).
Figure 26-11: Removing Switch Plate and Lock Block Retaining Plate
REMOVE 3 SHCS MARK POSITION OF WASHERS ON

IN RETAINING PLATE SWITCH PLATE AND REMOVE 2 SHCS
9. Remove the bearing block locking bolt (see Figure 26‐12).
Figure 26-12: Removing Bearing Block Locking Bolt
REMOVE LOCK BLOCK

LOCKING BOLT
Note: Examination gloves are suggested for handling the ballscrew to keep hands clean.
10. Thread the ball screw far enough into the ball nut toward the head end of the table to allow the
ballscrew to be pulled out of the rear bearing block and remove the ballscrew assembly as shown in
11. Remove all 3 parts of the thrust bearing from the recess in the head‐end of the bearing block. If the
thrust bearing is to be reused, make sure that no debris gets onto the bearing.
Figure 26-13: Removing the Ballscrew
26.3 Installing the Vertical Drive Ballscrew

1. Check the alignment of the vertical drive ball screw retainer block. Refer to Vertical Drive Ball Screw
Bearing Retainer Alignment Check on page 328.
!
CAUTION: Do not screw the ballscrew nut off the end of the ballscrew or the ball bearings may come
out making it difficult to reassemble.
Note: Examination gloves are suggested for handling the ballscrew to keep hands clean.
1. Unscrew the lock block off the removed ballscrew nut.
2. Screw the lock block onto the new ballscrew nut so that the locking bolt hole will be to the left of the
patient support as you are facing the gantry (see Figure 26‐14).
3. Thread the ball nut up the ballscrew until it is about in the middle of the ballscrew.
Figure 26-14: Removing Bearing Block Locking Bolt

THREAD BEARING BLOCK
ONTO BALLSCREW NUT
WITH HOLE TO COUCH LEFT
(AS YOU ARE FACING GANTRY)
4. Insert the non‐drive end of the ballscrew through the scissor hole so that the lock block fits into the
scissor opening (see Figure 26‐15).
Figure 26-15: Installing Ballscrew Lock Block
LOCK BLOCK INSERTED INTO

SCISSOR OPENING
5. Apply a coating of Areoshell grease #7 to both sides of the ball bearings of the thrust bearing.
Figure 26-16: Ball Bearing Cage Description
BALL BEARING CAGE CLOSED END BALL BEARING CAGE OPEN END
!
CAUTION: It is important to assemble the inner and outer thrust bearings in the correct orientation.
The concave side of each race must face the ball bearing cage.
Figure 26-17: Orientation of Inner and Outer Thrust Bearings in relation to Retainer Block
6. Install the 3 parts of the thrust bearing onto the ballscrew (Figure 26‐18 andFigure 26‐19) as follows:

a. Install race with the smaller inner diameter (ID) with the concave side toward the ball bearing cage,
and the flat side with letters facing away from the retainer block.
b. Install the ball bearing cage with the cage closed end facing away from the retainer block.
c. Install the second race with the larger ID with the concave side toward the ball bearing cage.

WITH SMALLER ID WITH LARGER ID
FLAT SIDE
WITH LETTERS
CONCAVE SIDE
The concave side of the race with the larger ID should face away from the retainer block and toward the ball
bearing cage.
LETTERS ON
SMALLER ID
RACE CONCAVE SIDE
OF LARGER ID RACE
BEARING CAGE
CLOSED END
7. Insert the drive end of the ball screw through the bearing block.
8. Apply a coating of Areoshell grease #7 to the ball bearings of the thrust bearing (Figure 26‐16 on
page 303).
9. Install the 3 parts of the thrust bearing onto the ballscrew (Figure 26‐20 and Figure 26‐21) as follows:
a. Install race with the larger ID first with the concave side toward the ball bearing cage.
b. Install the ball bearing cage with the cage closed end facing away from the bearing block.
c. Install the second race with the smaller ID with the concave part toward the ball bearing cage and
the letters facing away from the retainer block.

WITH LARGER ID WITH SMALLER ID
LETTERS
Note: Make sure the on the race with the smaller ID are facing away from the retainer block.
The concave side of the race with the larger ID should face away from the retainer block and toward the ball bearing
cage.
LETTERS ON
SMALLER ID RACE
BEARING CAGE
CLOSED END
CONCAVE SIDE OF LARGER ID RACE
10. Place the lock ring over the end of the ballscrew shaft with the lock ring tangs facing the end of the
shaft (Figure 26‐22). Push it up against the bearing.
11. Screw the spanner nut onto the end of the ballscrew with the tapered end of the nut toward the lock
ring.
Figure 26-22: Place lock ring over the end of the ballscrew shaft
LOCK RING SPANNER NUT TAPERED

SIDE TOWARD BEARING
12. Place the key into the shaft keyway
13. Slide the coupling part‐way onto the shaft (see Figure 26‐23).
14. Place suitable tool into the coupling to used to hold the ballscrew from turning (see Figure 26‐23) and
using a spanner wrench or pliers, snugly tighten (do not make too tight) the spanner nut against the
lock ring so that a tang on the lock ring aligns with a notch on the lock ring.
Figure 26-23: Tightening Spanner Nut
TIGHTEN RETAINING NUT SLIDE COUPLING PARTWAY SCREWDRIVER TO KEEP

WITH PLIERS ONTO SHAFT BALLSCREW FROM TURNING
15. Bend the lock ring tang down into a spanner nut notch so that it is flush with the spanner nut surface
BEND LOCK RING TANG KEY INSTALLED

INTO SPANNER NUT NOTCH
16. Push the coupling all the way up against the spanner nut. Remove the set screw, apply Loctite #243,
reinstall it and torque the set screw to 87 in‐lbs (9.8 N‐m).
COUPLING AGAINST
SPANNER NUT
17. Hand tighten the ballscrew nut into the lock block so that it is snugly against the lock block (see
Figure 26‐26).
18. Turn the ballscrew so that the lock block is pushed snugly against the scissor (see Figure 26‐26).
19. Apply Loctite #242 to the clamping bolt and install it into the lock block (see Figure 26‐26).
20. Tighten the lock block clamping bolt to 11 ft.‐lbs (15 N‐m) (see Figure 26‐26).
Figure 26-26: Installing Ballscrew Lock Block

INSTALL CLAMPING BOLT BALLSCREW NUT SNUGLY LOCK BLOCK SNUGLY
AGAINST LOCK BLOCK AGAINST SCISSOR CASTING
21. Check that the lock block switch actuator screw protrudes 3/16” (4.75 mm) (see Figure 26‐28). This

setting does not have to be exact since this screw is not used to make the final switch adjustment.
Final switch adjustment will be made later (see Step 26‐29 on page 316).
Figure 26-27: Ballscrew Lock Block Switch Actuator Setting

LOCK BLOCK LOCK BLOCK SWITCH ACTUATOR SHOULD
SWITCH ACTUATOR PROTRUDE 3/16” PAST SCISSOR CASTING
22. Apply Loctite #222 to the 3 lock block retainer plate SHCS and install the retainer plate with those 3
SHCS along with flatwashers (5/32” hex key) (see Figure 26‐29). Tighten them to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Figure 26-28: Installing the Lock Block Retaining Plate
INSTALL 3 SHCS W/FLATWASHERS

IN RETAINING PLATE
23. Gently spread the switch actuators so that the plastic actuator screw is between them as shown in
Figure 26‐29 on page 316 and rest the switch plate in position on the scissor casting as shown in
24. Apply Loctite #222 to the 2 switch plate SHCS, install flatwashers, and loosely attach the switch plate
(5/32” hex key) (see Figure 26‐29).
Figure 26-29: Installing the Switch Plate

LOOSELY INSTALL 2 SHCS
WITH FLATWASHERS
SWITCH
ACTUATORS ON
EACH END OF
PLASTIC SCREW
25. Position the switch plate so that he head‐end switch actuator is pushed to the end of its travel in
toward the switch without causing the actuator arm to bend (see Figure 26‐30) and tighten the switch
plate SHCS.
26. Torque the switch plate SHCS to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Figure 26-30: Adjusting the Switch Plate

HEAD-END SWITCH TORQUE SWITCH PLATE SHCS
NORMALLY FULLY ACTUATED TO 15 IN-LBS (1.7 N-M)
THE PLASTIC
SCREW IS NOT
USED FOR
ADJUSTMENT
FOOT-END SWITCH
NORMALLY
UNACTUATED
26.4 Notes on the Operation of the Vertical Safety

Switches
Refer to Figure 26‐30 on page 26‐317.
• These 2 switches are installed so to interrupt downward motion if the table top is lowered against an
obstruction
• The safety switches are adjusted so that under normal conditions the head‐end switch is fully
actuated and the foot‐end switch is unactuated.
• The head‐end switch is wired a normally open and the foot‐end switch is wired as normally closed. In
the normal operating position with no obstruction present the head‐end switch is actuated by the
nylon screw closing the circuit. The foot‐end switch is normally not actuated and closed, completing
the circuit.
• If the table top is lowered against an obstruction, the ball screw lock block will be pulled out of its
position in the scissor casting toward the foot‐end of the table and will release the head‐end switch
actuator and/or actuate the foot‐end switch to open the circuit and stop downward vertical motion.
• If the support top is lowered onto an obstruction and the safety switches are activated, the support
can be returned to operation by raising the support using the gantry controls.
• These switches do not interrupt normal upward operation commands or commands from the service
switches for vertical motion.
• If either of the switches become actuated during normal support operation, there is likely binding in
the scissor components.

1. Place the plastic insert inside the jaw of the ballscrew shaft coupling.
2. Attempt to place the motor into position (see Figure 26‐6 on page 292). If the coupling on the motor is
not positioned so that it can be engaged to the coupling on the ball screw shaft, the brake will need to
be removed so that the motor shaft can be rotated into alignment.
• Remove the upper part of the brake according to the procedure “Removing a Vertical Brake” on
page 214.
• Rotate the motor until the setscrew on the motor coupling is accessible from the left side of the
3. Place the motor into position (see Figure 26‐6 on page 292) and install the 4 #10‐32 x 3/4” SHCS motor
mounting screws with flat washers and lockwashers (see Figure 26‐5 on page 291).
5. Check that there is a 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm) gap between the motor coupling and the
ballscrew coupling (see Figure 26‐32). One way to check the gap would be with a 0.030 in. (0.8 mm)
feeler gauge.
If the gap is at least 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm), skip to Step 6 on page 321.
If the gap is NOT at least 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm), perform the following:
a. Remove the motor coupling setscrew (1/8 in. hex key), apply Loctite #242, and loosely reinsert the
setscrew.
• Loosen the encoder drive pulley setscrew (3/32 in. hex key).
• Move the coupling on the motor shaft until there is a 1/32 inch (0.030 inch or 0.8 mm) gap between
the motor coupling and the ballscrew coupling (see Figure 26‐32).
• Tighten the set screw to secure the motor coupling to the motor shaft.
• Slide the encoder drive pulley up against the coupling and tighten the setscrew (3/32 in. hex key).
0.030 in. (0.8 mm) GAP ENCODER

DRIVE PULLEY
Figure 26‐34.
15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Figure 26-33: Move the encoder bracket around the 2 pulleys
MARK AT 265 MM

35).
LOOP BELT AROUND

MOTOR AND
ENCODER PULLEYS
12. If the brake was removed, reinstall the brake according to the procedure Installing a Warner ERD
Vertical Brake P/N 4535 664 98912 (In Kit 4535 674 67771) on page 225.
13. Connect the brake connector J775 (see Figure 26‐36).

page 326.
chassis.
16. Apply a coating of Areoshell grease #7 to the threaded portion of the ballscrew, both in front and
behind the nut block.

MOTOR GROUND
GOES TO BACK OF
INVETER CHASSIS
MOTOR
CONNECTIONS:
WARNING: Use extreme caution when operating or working on equipment with covers removed.
Dangerous voltages are exposed when the gantry covers are removed. Accidental contact
with these voltages may cause serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
!
WARNING: Lowering the patient support with the vertical support brace in place will damage the
ballscrew drive. Failure to remove the vertical support brace will result in equipment damage
and/or serious injury and/or death to service personnel.
The scissor-action mechanism is exposed when the patient support telescoping base covers
are removed. Keep equipment and personnel away from the mechanical action of these
parts. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and/or serious injury and/or death
to service personnel.
procedure Removing the Vertical Safety Support on page 83.
holder.
20. Run the unit up and down to fully work the Grease into the nut block; add grease as necessary to
pack the unit.
21. Raise and lower the patient support to verify that the motor operates properly and that there is no
unusual vibration or noise.
22. Watch the vertical encoder belt while stopping and starting the vertical motor to see if slippage is
evident. If it is slipping perform the following:
a. Install the vertical safety support (see Installing the Vertical Safety Support on page 80).
• When the position is correct, torque the bracket screws to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
Removing the Vertical Safety Support on page 83).
Section 27
Section 27 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Bearing Retainer
Alignment Check
This vertical drive ball screw bearing retainer alignment procedure checks the alignment of the retainer
block that holds the vertical drive ball screw to the patient support frame, and provides instructions to
align the retainer block if needed.
This alignment check must be performed upon replacement of the vertical drive ball screw.
The vertical drive ball screw bearing retainer alignment procedure is applicable for a standard, bariatric,
or extended patient support.
Tools required:
• FSE tool kit
• Alignment tool # 459800751571
• Loctite #242
• 5/32 in. socket hex key
Estimated time: 3 hours
27.1 Preparation for Checking Alignment

1. The alignment check must be performed upon replacement of the vertical drive ball screw or vertical
motor. Prior to checking the alignment of the retainer block, both the vertical drive motor and the
vertical drive ball screw will have been removed. Refer to Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement ‐
Standard Support on page 250, or Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement ‐ Extended Support on
page 285.
2. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
WARNING: Turn off power supplies before servicing. Hazardous voltages are inside. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death..
27.2 Installing Alignment Tool and Checking

Alignment
3. Install the non‐threaded end of the alignment tool into the retainer block. Move the alignment tool
slide and tilt alignment tool as required for installation. See Figure 27‐1.
4. Thread the alignment tool into the scissor slide, and attach tool using the knurled handle.
5. Move the alignment tool slide toward the rear end of the base and engage the alignment tool slide
into the retainer block.
Figure 27-1: Installing the Alignment Tool
SLIDE
KNURLED
HANDLE
NON-THREADED
END
Note: A properly aligned retainer block will permit the alignment tool slide to enter the retainer evenly around the
circumference of the interface. Binding on any side confirms the need to align the retainer.
6. Verify the slide end of the alignment tool is centered in the retainer block. See Figure 27‐2 and
Figure 27-2: Alignment Tool Installed
SLIDE
Figure 27-3: Slide End of Alignment Tool Centered in Retainer Block
SLIDE
7. If retainer block is aligned properly, go to Removing Alignment Tool on page 337. If alignment is
required, go to Alignment Correction on page 333
27.3 Alignment Correction

8. If alignment correction is required, use a 5/32” hex key to loosen the four hex head screws and flat
washers securing the retainer block to the base welded assembly. See Figure 27‐4.
Note: The base welded assembly contains slots which allow alignment to the tool.
Figure 27-4: Loosening the Four Hex Head Screws and Flat Washers Securing the Retainer
9. Move the slide toward the rear of the base and engage the alignment tool slide into the retainer block.
Adjust retainer block as required to engage the alignment tool slide. See Figure 27‐5.
Figure 27-5: Engaging Alignment Tool Slide into Retainer
Note: Make sure the retainer block surface is parallel with base frame assembly top surface. See Figure 27‐6.
Figure 27-6: Retainer Block Surface Parallel with Base Frame Assembly Top Surface
RETAINER BLOCK
BASE FRAME
10. Using a 5/32” hex key, remove the four hex head screws and flat washers from the retainer block.
Use a wire brush or solvent cleaner to remove prior loctite on the screws.
Note: Loctite will not work with any contamination on the screw threads. Ensure screw threads are thoroughly cleaned
before installation, and avoid dirt, grease, or other contaminants when installing screws.
Note: Verify the cable clamps are installed to the upper right‐hand and left‐hand screws (viewed when facing the scanner)
prior to installing the screws.
11. Using Loctite #242, and a 5/32” hex key, install the four hex head screws and flat washers into the
retainer block. See Figure 27‐7.
12. Measure distance at each end of block to the base frame to verify dimensions are within 1 mm. See
Figure 27‐6. Torque the four screws to 15 in‐lbs (170 n‐cm). See Figure 27‐7.
Figure 27-7: Installing Screws into Retainer Block
27.4 Removing Alignment Tool

13. Loosen the knurled handle at the threaded end of the alignment tool. Move the slide securing
the alignment tool into the retainer block, and remove the alignment tool from the scissor slide.
See Figure 27‐8.
Note: Make sure the slide securing the alignment tool into the retainer block comes out easily. If not, repeat alignment
correction.
Figure 27-8: Removing Alignment Tool
27.5 Final Steps

14. Install the vertical drive ball screw as follows:
a. For the standard and bariatric patient support, refer to Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement ‐
Standard Support on page 250.
b. For the extended length patient support, refer to Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement ‐ Extended
Support on page 285.
Section 28
Section 28 Standard Support Horizontal Drive Motor Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal drive motor on standard Brilliance patient support
units. For Brilliance Bariatric patient support units or extended units, see the section (see ‘Bariatric &
Extended Horizontal Drive Motor Removal / Replacement on page 344). The horizontal drive motor is
mounted underneath the patient support top frame, at the rear of the patient support.
Tools Required: FE Tool Kit, sonic tension meter (p/n 4535 673 63911)
28.1 Removal
1. Remove the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedures in
the “Taking Patient Support Covers out of Service Position” on page 85 section.
2. Place the patient support covers into service position according to the procedure “Placing Lower
Covers into the Service Position and Installing the Vertical Safety Support” on page 70.
3. Install the vertical safety support according to the procedure “Installing the Vertical Safety Support”
on page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 28 Standard Support
WARNING: TURN OFF POWER to the patient support before servicing. hazardous voltages ARE inside.
failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
5. Loosen 2 motor mounting plate screws underneath the top frame as shown in Figure 28‐1 on
page 341). Loosen 1 motor mounting plate screw and the belt tension screw at rear of the patient
support (see Figure 28‐1) to relieve tension on the horizontal drive belt.
Figure 28-1: Relieving Belt Tension
Loosen 2 Motor Mounting Plate Screws Belt Tension Screw Loosen Motor Mounting
Plate Screw
6. Tag and disconnect wiring leads from horizontal Figure 1-2: Horizontal Drive Motor

drive motor. Cut ty‐wraps as required.
7. Loosen the set screw on the motor drive shaft.
8. Remove four screws and washers securing motor to
mounting plate, and remove motor.
28.2 Installation
1. Install horizontal drive motor with four screws and lock washers. Loctite and hand torque screws.
2. Tighten set screw on motor drive shaft.
3. Adjust motor adjusting plate to the full loose position and engage the belt around the clutch making
sure all grooves are engaged. Adjust the clutch on the lead screw so the clutch and motor pulleys are
in alignment and the belt is running straight.
4. Adjust the tension of the belt using the sonic tension meter (see ‘Checking Horizontal Drive Belt
Tension on page 707).
5. Tighten the three screws to secure the motor tensioning plate.
6. Recheck belt tension to ensure setting did not change during tightening, adjust if necessary.
7. Connect wiring leads to horizontal drive motor.
page 83.
11. Install the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers. Refer to “Brilliance Subframe
RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal” on page 93.
12. Perform patient support horizontal calibration according to the applicable Brilliance Calibration
manual.
Section 29
Section 29 Bariatric & Extended Horizontal Drive Motor Removal /
Replacement
This procedure is for the replacement of the Brilliance Bariatric and Extended patient support horizontal
drive motor P/N 4535 664 89521. For other models of Brilliance patient supports, see the section (see
‘Standard Support Horizontal Drive Motor Replacement Procedure on page 339).
The horizontal drive motor is mounted underneath the patient support top frame, at the rear of the
patient support.
Tools Required:
• FSE Tool Kit
• Sonic tension meter, P/N 4535 673 63911
Material Required:
• Loctite #222
Time Required: 3 hrs
29.1 Horizontal Drive Motor Removal

1. Remove the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedure
“Brilliance Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal” on page 93.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 29 Bariatric & Extended
WARNING: INSTALL the vertical safety support whenever personnel are working under the table. failure
to do so may result in personnel injury or death.
on page 80.
5. Cut the cable ties on the rear brace. The brake and clutch leads can be left connected and hanging
unless the belt is to be replaced.
6. Use a 3/16” hex key to remove the 4 SHCS attaching the rear brace as shown in Figure 29‐1 on
page 346 and remove the brace.
Figure 29-1: Rear Brace
REMOVE 4 SHCS
7. Using a 5/32” hex key, loosen the 4 motor mounting SHCS (see Figure 29‐2). In Figure 29‐2 on

page 347 the two top motor mounting screws are accessible thorough holes in the bearing plate. The
lower two are hidden from view.
8. Use a 3/16” hex key to loosen the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in Figure 29‐2 on
page 347.
9. Remove the belt adjusting screw (see Figure 29‐2) and slide the motor mounting plate to the left until
the mounting bolts are at the ends of the slots.
Figure 29-2: Motor Mounting Plate
4 MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE SHCS

(3/16” HEX KEY) BELT ADJUSTING
SCREW
2 UPPER MOTOR MOUNTING SHCS 2 LOWER MOTOR MOUNTING SHCS

ACCESSIBLE THROUGH HOLES HIDDEN BEHIND BEARING PLATE
(5/32” HEX KEY) (5/32” HEX KEY)
10. Using a 1/8” hex key, loosen the horizontal drive pulley setscrews (see Figure 29‐3).
Figure 29-3: Horizontal Drive Pulley (Viewed from the Bottom)

LOOSEN 2 PULLEY
SETSCREWS
11. Using a 3/16” hex key, remove the 3 SHCS attaching the rear bearing support plate shown in
Figure 29‐4 on page 349 and remove the plate, bearing and pulley as an assembly from the motor
shaft.
Figure 29-4: Rear Bearing Support Plate

REMOVE 3 SHCS
12. Note which terminals the motor power leads go to on the horizontal relay, cut cable ties as required,
and disconnect the motor power leads from the relay (see Figure 29‐5).
Figure 29-5: Horizontal Drive Relay
13. Cut cable ties as required to free the motor encoder connector and disconnect it (see Figure 29‐6).
Figure 29-6: Horizontal Drive Motor Encoder Cable
14. Remove the screw to disconnect the ground leads from the motor housing.
15. Note where the temperature sensor leads are connected and disconnect them. Leave the temperature
sensor mounted to the motor; the replacement motor will come with a new temperature sensor
already attached.
Figure 29-7: Horizontal Drive Motor Connections
Thermal Sensor
Ground Connections
16. While supporting the motor, remove the 4 motor mounting SHCS shown in Figure 29‐2 on page 347

and remove the motor.
4 MOTOR MOUNTING SHCS

(5/32” HEX KEY)
29.2 Horizontal Drive Motor Installation

1. Attach the thermal sensor to the motor so that it will be on top when the motor is installed with the
power connections exiting to the left as shown in (see Figure 29‐7 on page 352). This will make it
easier to attach the ground wires on the bottom after the motor is installed.
2. From under the couch insert the shaft of the motor through the motor mounting plate. Position the
motor so that the motor power leads exit toward the left side of the table as shown in (see Figure 29‐7
on page 352).
3. Apply Loctite #222 the 4 motor mounting SHCS and attach the motor as shown in (see Figure 29‐8 on
page 353). Leave these screws slightly loose until the belt tension is adjusted.
Note: In the following step make sure to install the belt.
4. Place the key in the motor shaft keyway, loop the belt around the pulley and install the pulley,
bearing, and mounting plate assembly onto the shaft of the new motor.
5. Apply Loctite #222 to the 3 SHCS and install them to attach the rear bearing support plate (see
Figure 29‐4 on page 29‐349). Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (15 N‐m).
6. Apply Loctite #222 to the pulley setscrews, (see Figure 29‐3 on page 29‐348) install them, and tighten
them to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
7. Attach the rear brace with 4 SHCS as shown in (see Figure 29‐1 on page 346). Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs
(15 N‐m).
8. Tighten the belt adjustment (see Figure 29‐2 on page 29‐347) while making sure that the belt correctly
engages the grooves in the clutch and motor pulleys.
9. Adjust the tension of the belt using the sonic tension meter (see (see ‘Checking Horizontal Drive Belt
Tension on page 707)).
10. Using a 3/16” hex key, tighten the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in (see Figure 29‐2
on page 347). Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (15 N‐m).
11. Using a 5/32” hex key, tighten the 4 motor mounting SHCS shown in (see Figure 29‐2 on page 347)
(there are holes in the bearing plate to allow hex key access to the upper two motor mounting SHCS).
Tighten them to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
12. Secure the clutch and brake leads to the rear brace with cable ties.
13. Connect the motor temperature sensor leads (see Figure 29‐7 on page 29‐352).
14. Connect the ground leads to the motor (see Figure 29‐7 on page 29‐352). Torque the ground screw to 6

in‐lbs (0.6 N‐m).
15. Connect the motor encoder and use a cable tie to secure the connector where it was before (see
Figure 29‐6 on page 29‐351).
16. Connect the motor power leads to on the horizontal relay (see Figure 29‐5 on page 29‐350). Tie all the
wires in place where they were before.
18. Remove the vertical safety support according to the procedure “Removing the Vertical Safety
19. Take the patient support covers out of the service position according to the procedure “Taking Patient
Support Covers out of Service Position” on page 85.
20. Install the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedures in
section 3, “Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation” on page 107.
21. Power up the system and test the system to make sure it is operating properly.
Section 30
Section 30 Standard Horizontal Drive Belt Removal / Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal drive belt on standard Brilliance patient support
units. For Brilliance bariatric patient support units or extended units, see the section (see ‘Bariatric &
Extended Horizontal Drive Belt Replacement Procedure on page 361).
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
30.1 Removal
1. Remove the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers. Refer to “Brilliance Subframe
WARNING INSTALL THE VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT WHENEVER PERSONNEL

ARE WORKING UNDER THE TABLE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT
IN PERSONNEL INJURY OR DEATH.
on page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 30 Standard Horizontal
5. Loosen 2 motor mounting plate screws underneath the top frame as shown in Figure 30‐1 on
page 358). Loosen 1 motor mounting plate screw and the belt tension screw at rear of the patient
support (see Figure 30‐1) to relieve tension on the horizontal drive belt.
(Under Top Frame) Plate Screw
6. Remove four screws from the bearing plate and remove plate. Refer to Figure 30‐2 on page 359.

7. Remove the belt.
Remove these four screws to
remove bearing plate
Bearing Plate Removal
30.1.1 Installation
1. Install belt around clutch and motor drive shaft.
2. Install the bearing plate with four screws (see Figure 30‐2).
3. Adjust motor adjusting plate to the full loose position and engage the belt around the clutch making
sure all grooves are engaged. Adjust the clutch on the lead screw so the clutch and motor pulleys are
in alignment and the belt is running straight.
5. Tighten the three screws to secure the motor tensioning plate (see Figure 30‐1).
6. Recheck belt tension to ensure setting did not change during tightening, adjust if necessary.
7. Connect wiring leads to horizontal drive motor.
page 83.
11. Install the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers. Refer to “Subframe RH, LH, and
Rear Covers Installation” on page 107.
12. Perform patient support horizontal calibration according to the applicable Brilliance Calibration
manual.
Section 31
Section 31 Bariatric & Extended Horizontal Drive Belt Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the Brilliance bariatric or extended patient support horizontal
drive belt P/N 4535 664 96971. For standard Brilliance patient support units, see the section (see ‘Standard
Horizontal Drive Belt Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 356).
The horizontal drive belt (P/N 4535 664 96971) is mounted at the rear of the patient support top frame.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
31.1 Belt Removal

1. Remove the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedures in
the “Brilliance Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal” on page 93 section.
3. Cut the cable ties on the rear brace and disconnect the leads to the brake and the clutch as shown in
Figure 31-1: Rear Brace ‐ Horizontal Brake and Clutch Connections

CLUTCH CONNECTIONS REMOVE 4 SHCS
(2 ON RIGHT ARE OUTSIDE FRAME)
BRAKE CONNECTION

page 363.

SCREW

(5/32” HEX KEY) (5/32” HEX KEY)
8. Using a 1/8” hex key, loosen the horizontal drive pulley setscrews (see Figure 31‐3).
Figure 31-3: Horizontal Drive Pulley (Viewed from the Bottom)

LOOSEN 2 PULLEY
SETSCREWS
9. Using a 3/16” hex key, remove the 3 SHCS attaching the rear bearing support plate shown in
Figure 31‐4 on page 365 and remove the plate, bearing and pulley as an assembly from the motor
shaft.
10. Remove the belt.
Figure 31-4: Rear Bearing Support Plate

REMOVE 3 SHCS
31.1.1 Installation
1. Install belt around clutch pulley.
Note: In the following step make sure to install the belt.
2. Place the key in the motor shaft keyway, loop the belt around the pulley and install the pulley,
bearing, and mounting plate assembly onto the shaft of the new motor.
3. Apply Loctite #222 to the 3 SHCS and install them to attach the rear bearing support plate (Figure 31‐
4 on page 365).
4. Apply Loctite #222 to the pulley setscrews, install them, and tighten them. Torque them to 15 in‐lbs
(1.7 N‐m).
5. Attach the rear brace with 4 SHCS as shown in Figure 31‐1 on page 362. Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (15
N‐m).
6. Tighten the belt adjustment (see Figure 31‐2) while making sure that the belt correctly engages the
grooves in the clutch and motor pulleys.
8. Using a 3/16” hex key, tighten the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in Figure 31‐2 on
page 363. Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (15 N‐m)
9. Using a 5/32” hex key, tighten the 4 motor mounting SHCS shown in Figure 31‐2 on page 363 (there
are holes in the bearing plate to allow hex key access to the upper two motor mounting SHCS).
Torque them to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
10. Secure the clutch and brake leads to the rear brace with cable ties.
11. Install the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedures in the
“Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation” on page 107 section.
12. Turn ON power to the system. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down Procedure,
13. Test the system to make sure it is operating properly.
Section 32
Section 32 Standard Horizontal Brake Replacement Procedure
This procedure is for the horizontal brake P/N 4535 670 45171 on the Brilliance standard patient support.
For Brilliance bariatric and extended patient support units, refer to the section (see ‘Bariatric & Extended
Support Horizontal Brake Replacement on page 377).
The horizontal brake is a helper brake to assist the motor in stopping the horizontal bed in the 10mm
required by IEC60601‐2‐44 22.4.101. This requirement states that the horizontal motion should be stopped
within 10mm upon activation of an E‐Stop.
This new brake was required to meet this specification at the maximum horizontal velocity. The brake is
controlled by hardware and is activated at E‐Stop detection and remains engaged for approximately 2
seconds. It then releases allowing the top to free float.
The horizontal brake is only activated upon an E‐Stop detection. It is a power‐on type brake and requires
power to engage. The horizontal brake is mounted to the left, inside channel of the patient support outer
subframe.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• 0.020” (0.5 mm) feeler gage
Note: Brilliance patient supports may be equipped with one of a number of absolute encoders. The pictures in this section
show a Baumer encoder; however the procedures are the same for supports with other models of encoders.
Note: Brilliance patient supports may also be equipped with different relative encoders; however the procedures are the
same for relative encoders that do not look like the one pictured.
32.1 Standard Horizontal Brake Removal

WARNING INSTALL THE VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT WHENEVER PERSONNEL

ARE WORKING UNDER THE TABLE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT
IN PERSONNEL INJURY OR DEATH.
on page 80.
5. Disconnect the absolute encoder cable under the patient support front mounting bracket as shown in
6. Disconnect the horizontal brake cable.
Figure 32-1: Encoder Cable Connections Underneath Patient Support Front Mounting Bracket
7. Loosen the absolute encoder coupling setscrew closest to the brake (7/64” hex key) as shown in
Note: Note: This procedure leaves the absolute encoder attached to the bracket because the lower rear encoder screw is
difficult to access.
8. Remove 2 screws on the side of the encoder bracket that mount it to the drive screw bearing block as
shown in Figure 32‐2 on page 371.
9. Remove the 2 brake mounting bracket screws as shown in Figure 32‐2 on page 371.
Figure 32-2: Horizontal Encoder and Brake Assembly
Absolute Position Encoder Loosen Coupling Horizontal Brake Relative Position Encoder
Setscrew
Absolute Encoder Bracket Leave These 2, L-Bracket Remove 2 Brake Bracket Remove 2 Encoder Bracket
Screws Installed Mounting Screws. Mounting Screws.
10. Remove the 2, L‐bracket screws shown in Figure 32‐3 on page 372 from the bottom of the frame.
Figure 32-3: L‐Bracket Screws in Bottom of Frame
L-Bracket Screws
11. Remove the absolute encoder and bracket assembly (see Figure 32‐4).
Figure 32-4: Absolute Encoder and Bracket Assembly
12. Loosen the 2 brake plate setscrews (5/64” Hex Key) in the brake plate hub (see Figure 32‐5).

13. Remove the brake plate and the brake.
14. Remove the 4 screws attaching the brake to the bracket and remove the brake.
Figure 32-5: Brake Plate Setscrews
Loosen Brake Plate

Setscrews
32.2 Standard Horizontal Brake Installation

1. Attach the brake to the mounting bracket screws with 4 screws.
2. Install the brake and bracket assembly over the end of the drive screw as shown in Figure 32‐5 on
page 373.
3. Align the keyway in the brake plate with the key in the shaft and slide the brake plate on the end of
the drive screw as shown in Figure 32‐5 on page 373.
4. Route the brake cable through the hole in the frame as shown in Figure 32‐5 on page 373.
5. Place the absolute encoder and bracket assembly (Figure 32‐4 on page 372) into position with the end
of the drive screw engaging the coupling as shown in Figure 32‐2 on page 371.
6. Attach the absolute encoder bracket by installing the 2 screws into the drive screw bearing block (see
Figure 32‐2) and 2 screws into the L‐bracket (see Figure 32‐3). Once all 4 screws are installed, tighten
the screws.
7. Tighten the absolute encoder coupling setscrew.
8. Loosely install the 2 screws to attach the brake mounting bracket (see Figure 32‐2). Leave the screws
loose enough to allow movement of the bracket.
9. Hold the brake tight up against the brake plate to align it vertically and position the brake so that the
top of the plate is flush with the top of the brake assembly as shown in Figure 32‐6 on page 375. While
holding the brake in this position, tighten the 2 screws in the brake mounting bracket.
10. Rotate the drive screw so that a hex key can be inserted into one of the brake plate setscrews as shown
in
11. With the hex key in place, slide a 0.020” (0.5 mm) feeler gauge between the brake plate and the brake
as shown in Figure 32‐6 on page 375. It’s best to have the feeler gage span as much of the face of the
brake as possible.
12. Slide the plate to snugly sandwich the feeler gage between the brake plate and the brake and tighten
the brake plate setscrew.
13. Tighten the other brake plate setscrew.
14. Tie the cables to the cable tie pint as shown in Figure 32‐6 on page 375.
Figure 32-6: Brake Plate Alignment
Top of Brake Plate Even

With Brake
0.020” (0.5 mm) Feeler Gage
Between Brake and Plate
Hex Key In Brake Plate
Setscrew
15. Manually turn the horizontal drive screw by hand and verify that there is no binding and that there is
no scraping noises. If there is binding or scraping recheck the brake alignment and plate gap.
16. Move the table top horizontally and make sure that the horizontal drive screw is straight and rotates
without any wobble. If the drive screw is not straight, replace it.
17. Check the absolute encoder coupling and makes sure that it is aligned according to.“Checking The
Absolute Encoder Coupling Alignment” on page 405
18. Connect horizontal brake cable.
19. Connect the encoder cable and tie it into position as shown in Figure 32‐1 on page 369.
page 83.
23. Install patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers. Refer to “Subframe RH, LH, and
24. Perform patient support horizontal calibration according to the applicable Brilliance CT Calibration
manual.
25. Verify that the patient support is operating properly.
Section 33
Section 33 Bariatric & Extended Support Horizontal Brake
Replacement
This procedure is for the replacement of the Brilliance bariatric or extended patient support horizontal
drive brake P/N 4535 673 99181. For Brilliance standard patient support units, see the section (see
‘Standard Horizontal Brake Replacement Procedure on page 367).
The horizontal brake is a helper brake to assist the motor in stopping the horizontal bed in the 10mm
required by IEC60601‐2‐44 22.4.101. This requirement states that the horizontal motion should be stopped
within 10mm upon activation of an E‐Stop.
This additional brake was required to meet this specification at the maximum horizontal velocity. The
brake is controlled by hardware and is only activated upon an E‐Stop detection and remains engaged for
approximately 2 seconds. It then releases allowing the top to free float. It is a power‐on type brake and
requires power to engage.
The horizontal brake is mounted to the left, inside channel of the patient support outer subframe.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Loctite #222
33.1 Brake Removal

1. Remove the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedures
page 80.
WARNING INSTALL THE VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT BRACE WHENEVER

PERSONNEL ARE WORKING UNDER THE TABLE. FAILURE TO DO SO
MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY OR DEATH.
5. Cut the cable ties on the rear brace and disconnect the leads to the brake as shown in Figure 33‐1 on
page 378.
BRAKE CONNECTION
6. Loosen the two setscrews in the brake plate hub (see Figure 33‐2) and remove the hub from the shaft.
7. Remove the 4 SHCS attaching the brake as shown in Figure 33‐2 on page 380 and remove the brake.
Figure 33-2: Horizontal Brake

REMOVE 4 SHCS ATTACHING BRAKE
(2 LOWER SCREWS HIDDEN IN PHOTO)
LOOSEN SET SCREWS IN

BRAKE HUB
33.2 Installation
1. Place the brake in position and attach it with 4 SHCS as shown in Figure 33‐2 on page 380.
2. Place the key in the shaft slot and slide the brake hub onto the shaft.
3. Apply Loctite #222 to the brake plate hub set screws and partially install them into the hub.
4. Place a 0.010” feeler gage against the brake between the brake plate and the brake hub slide the hub
up against it so there is a 0.010” gap (+/‐0.005”) between the plate and the brake. Tighten the setscrews
in the hub (see Figure 33‐2).
5. Connect the brake as shown in Figure 33‐1 on page 378. Tie the clutch and brake leads to the rear
brace with cable ties.
6. Turn ON power to the system. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/Power Down Procedure,
page 83.
9. Install the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedure
“Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation” on page 107.
Section 34
Section 34 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the horizontal clutch on the Brilliance standard patient support. For Brilliance
bariatric and extended patient support units, refer to the section (see ‘Bariatric & Extended Support
Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement on page 388). The horizontal drive clutch (P/N 4535 664 94822) is
located at the rear of the patient support.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
34.1 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Removal


page 80.
5. Loosen 2 motor mounting plate screws underneath the top frame as shown in Figure on page 384).

6. Loosen 1 motor mounting plate screw and the belt tension screw at rear of the patient support (see
Figure ) to relieve tension on the horizontal drive belt.
(Under Top Frame) Plate Screw
7. Disconnect the wires and the MOV from the clutch. Refer to Figure 34‐2 on page 385.

8. Remove the three screws securing the rear support bearing assembly as shown in Figure 34‐2 on
page 385 and remove it.
Figure 34-2: Rear Support Bearing Block Support
Clutch Connections MOV
Rear Support Bearing Block Remove 3 Screws
9. Loosen the 2 setscrews in the clutch collar that secure it to the lead screw (see Figure 34‐3).
10. Slide the clutch off the end of the lead screw.
Figure 34-3: Clutch Collar Set Screws Location
Clutch Collar Setscrews
34.2 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Installation

1. Slide the clutch back onto the end of the lead screw as far as it will go until it is up against the
shoulder on the lead screw.
2. Remove the two setscrews from the clutch collar (see Figure 34‐3), apply Loctite #222 to them and
reinstall them.
3. Tighten the 2 setscrews in the clutch collar to secure it to the lead screw (see Figure 34‐3).
4. Attach the rear support bearing assembly with the three screws as shown in Figure 34‐2 on page 385.
5. Connect the wires to the clutch. Make sure to reinstall the MOV spike protector (see Figure 34‐2).
6. Adjust motor adjusting plate to the fully loose position and engage the belt around the clutch and
motor pulleys making sure all grooves are engaged.
7. Check visually that motor and clutch pulleys are aligned so that the belt is running parallel to the rear
frame of the table. If necessary, loosen the clutch collar setscrews, reposition the clutch on the lead
screw so the belt is parallel to the rear frame, and retighten the setscrews.
8. Use the tension adjusting screw (see Figure ), adjust the tension using the sonic tension meter (see
Checking Horizontal Drive Belt Tension on page 707).
9. Tighten the three screws to secure the motor tensioning plate (see Figure ).
10. Recheck belt tension to ensure setting did not change during tightening, and readjust the tension if
necessary.
page 83.
15. Perform patient support horizontal calibration. Refer to the applicable Brilliance CT Calibration
manual.
Section 35
Section 35 Bariatric & Extended Support Horizontal Drive Clutch
Replacement
This procedure is for the replacement of the Brilliance bariatric and extended patient support horizontal
drive clutch. For standard Brilliance patient support units, see the section (see ‘Standard Horizontal Drive
Belt Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 356).
The Brilliance Bariatric patient support horizontal drive clutch (P/N 4535 664 94823) is mounted at the rear
of the patient support top frame.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Loctite #222
35.1 Belt Removal


page 80.

BRAKE CONNECTION

page 391.

SCREW

(5/32” HEX KEY) (5/32” HEX KEY)
10. Loosen the two setscrews in the brake hub (see Figure 35‐3) and remove the hub from the shaft.

11. Remove the brake and brake mounting plate as an assembly Figure 35‐3 on page 392.
12. Remove the key from the drive screw shaft keyway.

BRAKE HUB
13. Loosen the setscrews in the clutch collar as shown in Figure 35‐4 on page 393.

14. Slide the clutch off the shaft.
Figure 35-4: Horizontal Drive Clutch
REMOVE SETSCREWS
35.2 Installing the Horizontal Clutch

1. Place the key into the drive screw keyway and slide the clutch onto the shaft until it is up against the
shoulder on the drive screw.
2. Install the belt around the clutch and motor pulleys.
3. Apply loctite #222 to the setscrews and install them into the clutch collar as shown in Figure 35‐4 on
page 393 and tighten them snugly.
4. Install the brake assembly onto the drive shaft.
5. Attach the rear brace with 4 SHCS as shown in Figure 35‐1 on page 389. Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (15
N‐m).
grooves in the brake and motor pulleys.
page 391. Torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (15 N‐m).
Torque them to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m).
11. Place the key in the shaft keyway and slide the brake hub onto the shaft.
12. Place a 0.010” feeler gage against the brake between the brake plate and the brake hub slide the hub
up against it so there is a 0.010” gap between the plate and the brake (Figure 35‐3 on page 392).
13. Check that the clutch gap is 0.010 all around the plate. Adjust as needed and when the clearance is
correct tighten the setscrews in the hub to 10 in‐lbs (1.1 N‐m).
14. Connect the leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 35‐1 on page 389
15. Connect the MOV and the brake wires to the clutch terminals as shown in Figure 35‐1 on page 389.
Tie the clutch and brake leads to the rear brace with cable ties.
page 83.
Section 36
Section 36 Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder &
Coupling Replacement
This procedure is for replacing the horizontal absolute position encoder and/or coupling on Brilliance
standard patient supports. For Brilliance bariatric and extended patient supports, see the section (see
‘Bariatric Absolute & Relative Position Encoders Replacement on page 421).
The Brilliance standard patient support absolute encoder is mounted at the left front left of the patient
support upper subframe.
Tools Required:
• Philips Standard FSE Tool Kit
• #1 Phillips screwdriver with at least a 4 in. shaft
• 0.020 in. feeler gauge
WARNING: There is danger of becoming infected from blood-borne pathogens. Wear nitrile gloves and
follow key market policies and procedures for decontamination and protection against
exposure to blood-borne pathogens when handling parts that may have come into contact
with substance from patients. Exposure to blood borne pathogens may result in serious
personnel injury or death.
36.1 Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder

and Encoder Removal

page 80.
5. Disconnect the absolute position encoder cable connection underneath the front of the patient
support upper subframe. Refer to Figure 36‐1 on page 397.
Figure 36-1: Encoder Cable Connections
6. If only the encoder is to be replaced, loosen the clamping screw in the shaft coupling closest to the
encoder (see Figure 36‐2).
7. If the coupling is also to be replaced, loosen the both clamping screws in the shaft coupling (see
Figure 36‐2).
Figure 36-2: CT Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder

Loosen Coupling Clamping Screw for Loosen Coupling Clamping Screw for
Removing Encoder Removing Coupling
Reposition 4 Encoder Cleats

(Back One Hidden In This View)
CT Absolute Position Encoder
8. Loosen one of the 4 screws in the 4 cleats that secure the encoder to the encoder bracket enough so
that the cleat can be rotated.
9. Rotate the cleat so that the flat side is facing the encoder as shown in Figure 36‐3 on page 399.
10. Tighten the cleat screw enough to hold the cleat in that position.
11. Repeat Step 8 on page 399 to Step 10 on page 399 for the other 3 encoder cleats.
12. Remove the encoder.
13. Remove the coupling if it is to be replaced.
Note: One way to rotate the inside bottom cleat is with a long, thin, flat‐bladed screwdriver.
Figure 36-3: Positioning Encoder Cleats
Cleat Positioned with

Flat Side Toward Encoder
for Encoder Removal
36.2 Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder

and Coupling Installation
1. If the coupling was removed, install the coupling into the end of the horizontal drive screw with the
clamping screws toward the outside when the screw heads are facing up as shown in Figure 36‐4 on
page 400. This position will provide easier access to tighten the clamping screws.
Figure 36-4: Coupling Clamping Screw Positioning
Clamping Screw Toward Outside

with Head Up
2. Make sure that the 4 encoder mounting cleats are positioned so that the flat sides are toward the
encoder and the flange of the encoder can pass them (see Figure 36‐5).
3. Thread the encoder cable through the hole in the upper subframe.
4. Position the encoder into the bracket so that the encoder shoulder fits into the bracket hole and the
encoder flange is up against the bracket.

Flat Side Toward Encoder
for Encoder Installation
5. Loosen the cleat screws and turn all 4 cleats so that the round part of each cleat is on top of the
encoder flange and tighten the screws to clamp the encoder flange.

Round Side Over Encoder
Flange to Clamp Encoder
6. If the coupling was removed check that it slides easily on encoder shaft and the drive screw shafts
between the encoder and the brake. If it does not slide freely, or if the previous coupling failed check
the alignment according to the procedure “Checking and Adjusting the Encoder Coupling
Alignment” on page 405.
7. If the coupling was removed, position the coupling so that it is about 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) from the brake
as shown in Figure 36‐7 on page 404.
8. Tighten the drive coupling setscrew(s).
9. Connect the encoder cable and tie it into position underneath patient support front mounting bracket
(see Figure 36‐1 on page 397).
10. If the installation is complete, proceed to “Returning the System to Operation” on page 414
Figure 36-7: Coupling Position
Coupling Positioned about

1/4 in. (6.4 mm) from the Encoder
36.3 Checking and Adjusting the Encoder Coupling

Alignment
36.3.1 Checking The Absolute Encoder Coupling Alignment
If the encoder coupling has failed or if any component on the horizontal drive screw has been replaced or
moved the encoder coupling alignment should be checked.
if the encoder shaft is not aligned with the horizontal drive screw it will cause the coupling to flex and
may cause the coupling to fatigue and fail prematurely.
First check that the horizontal drive screw is not bent. Move the table top horizontally and watch the
encoder coupling. there should not be any axial movement of the coupling (wobble). If there is wobble,
replace the horizontal drive screw.
Alignment of the encoder coupling determined by a visual check. To determine if the encoder shaft is
aligned with the horizontal drive screw look closely at the gaps in the coupling. The gaps in the coupling
should remain the same width around the coupling as shown in Figure 36‐8 on page 406 and not open
and close during rotation. If the gaps are not an even width, go to “Aligning the Encoder Coupling” on
page 406.
Figure 36-8: Determining Coupling Alignment
Aligned Coupling Misaligned Coupling

Gaps Are the Same Width Around the Coupling Gaps Are Not the Same Width Around the Coupling
36.3.2 Aligning the Encoder Coupling

If the Encoder coupling is misaligned:
1. Loosen the 6 mounting screws on the side of the encoder bracket that are shown in Figure 36‐9 on
page 407. Loosen them enough to allow the bracket to move.
2. Loosen the 2 mounting screws on the bottom of the subframe that are shown in Figure 36‐9 on
page 407. Loosen them enough to allow the bracket to move.
Figure 36-9: Screws to Loosen for Coupling Alignment

Loosen 6 Side Screws
Loosen 2 Bottom Screws
3. Move the encoder bracket up or down until to relieve all vertical stress on the coupling so that the
gaps are equal (see Figure 36‐8 on page 406).
4. When the coupling is aligned vertically, hold it in position and tighten the two screws that attach the
encoder bracket to the horizontal screw bearing block (see Figure 36‐10).
5. Make sure the L support bracket is against the bottom of the subframe (but don’t tighten the bottom
screws yet) and tighten the two screws that attach the L‐bracket to the encoder bracket (see Figure 36‐
10).
Figure 36-10: Screws to Tighten when Coupling is in Vertical Alignment

Tighten 2 L-Bracket Screws Tighten 2 Bearing Block Screws When
When Coupling is Vertically Aligned Coupling is Vertically Aligned
6. Move the encoder side to side until the coupling is aligned. While holding the bracket in alignment
tighten the
2, L‐bracket mounting screws on the bottom of the subframe that are shown in Figure 36‐11 on
page 409.
7. Check the alignment of the coupling and adjust the alignment as necessary.
Figure 36-11: Screws to Tighten When Coupling is Aligned Side‐to‐Side
Tighten 2 Bottom Screws

When coupling is Aligned Side-to-Side
8. Slide a 0.020” (0.5 mm) feeler gauge between the brake plate and the brake as shown in Figure 36‐12
on page 411. It’s best to have the feeler gage span as much of the face of the brake as possible.
9. Push the brake and mounting bracket to snugly sandwich the feeler gage between the brake plate and
the brake.
10. Position the brake so that the top of the plate is even with the top of the brake assembly as shown in
11. While holding the brake in this position, tighten the 2 screws in the brake mounting bracket.

Top of Brake Plate Even 0.020” (0.5 mm) Feeler Gage
With Brake Between Brake and Plate
Brake
Mounting Bracket
Screws
12. If the brake cannot be moved enough to get it within 0.020 in. (0.5 mm) of the brake plate:
a. Position the brake so that the top of the plate is even with the top of the brake assembly as shown in
Figure 36‐13 on page 413
b. Position the brake so the gap between the brake and the brake plate is the same at the top as it is at
the bottom.
c. While holding the brake in this position, tighten the 2 screws in the brake mounting bracket (see
d. Loosen the 2 setscrews in that secure the brake plate to the drive screw shaft.
e. Rotate the drive screw so that a hex key can be inserted into one of the brake plate setscrews as
shown in
f. With the hex key in place, slide a 0.020” (0.5 mm) feeler gauge between the brake plate and the
brake as shown in Figure 36‐13 on page 413. It’s best to have the feeler gage span as much of the
face of the brake as possible.
g. Push the brake plate to tightly sandwich the feeler gage between the brake plate and the brake as
shown in Figure 36‐13 on page 413 and tighten the brake plate setscrew.
h. Tighten the other brake plate setscrew.
Top of Brake Plate Even

With Brake
0.020” (0.5 mm) Feeler Gage
Between Brake and Plate
Hex Key In Brake Plate
Setscrew
36.4 Returning the System to Operation

page 83.
manual.
6. Verify that the patient support is operating correctly.
Section 37
Section 37 Std Horizontal Relative Position Encoder Replacement
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal relative position encoder on standard Brilliance
patient support units. For Brilliance bariatric and extended patient support units, see the section (see
‘Bariatric Absolute & Relative Position Encoders Replacement on page 421).
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 37 Std Horizontal
The Brilliance standard patient support horizontal relative positional encoder is mounted to the left,
inside channel of the patient support outer subframe along with the horizontal absolute position encoder
and the horizontal brake as shown in Figure 37‐1 on page 416.
Figure 37-1: Horizontal Encoder and Brake Assembly
Absolute Position Encoder Horizontal Brake Relative Position Encoder
37.1 Standard Horizontal Relative Position Encoder

Removal

page 80.
5. Remove the absolute position encoder and the horizontal brake according to the procedure (see
6. Disconnect the relative position encoder cable located underneath the patient support front mounting
bracket as shown in Figure 37‐2 on page 418.
Figure 37-2: Encoder Cable Connections Underneath Patient Support Front Mounting Bracket
7. Loosen the 2 setscrews in the encoder drive collar (0.050” hex key).
8. Remove two screws, lock washers and flat washers securing CT positional encoder, and remove
encoder.
Note: There have been other models of relative position encoders used on Brilliance patient supports than the one shown in
Figure 37‐3 on page 419. However, the procedure is the same and the operation is the same. Replacement encoders
may not have the same appearance as the one removed.
Figure 37-3: Horizontal Relative Position Encoder
Loosen 2 Setscrews in
Remove 2 Encoder Encoder Drive Collar
Mounting Screws
37.2 Standard Horizontal Relative Position Encoder

Installation
1. Slide the encoder onto the end of the horizontal drive screw and mount it with 2 screws, lock washers
and flat washers as shown in Figure 37‐3 on page 419.
2. Tighten the 2 setscrews in the encoder drive collar.
3. Connect the encoder cable.
4. Install the horizontal brake and absolute position encoder according to the procedure “Standard
Horizontal Brake Installation” on page 373.
page 83.
manual.
10. Verify that the patient support is operating properly.
Section 38
Section 38 Bariatric Absolute & Relative Position Encoders
Replacement
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal absolute and/or relative position encoders on
Brilliance bariatric patient support units. For standard Brilliance patient support units, see either the
section (see ‘Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder & Coupling Replacement on page 395) or
the section (see ‘Standard Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder & Coupling Replacement on page 395).
For extended patient support units, see the section (see ‘Extended Support Absolute & Relative Position
Encoders Removal/Replacement on page 433).
The horizontal absolute encoder (P/N 4535 673 99251) and the relative position encoder (P/N 4535 673
99231) are along left side of the patient support top frame near the front as shown in Figure 38‐1 on
page 422.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Loctite #222
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 38 Bariatric Absolute &
Figure 38-1: Horizontal Absolute and Position Encoders

ABSOLUTE ENCODER POSITION ENCODER
P/N 4535 673 99251 P/N 4535 673 99231
38.1 Encoder Removal


page 80.
5. Cut the cable ties securing the encoder connectors to the front underside of the couch as shown in
6. Disconnect the absolute encoder and the position encoder if it is to be replaced.
Figure 38-2: Encoder Connectors Connection
7. Remove the two bolts in from under the upper subframe that attach the encoder mounting block to
the upper subframe as shown in Figure 38‐3 on page 425.
8. Remove the two bolts in from under the upper subframe that attach the drive screw bearing block to
the upper subframe as shown in Figure 38‐3 on page 425. This will allow the drive screw to be pulled
away from the subframe to get to the absolute encoder mounting screws.
9. Loosen the SHCS attaching the head‐end drive screw bearing block to the sub frame (this will allow
movement of the drive screw).
Figure 38-3: Absolute Encoder Mounting Block and Drive Screw Bearing Block Attaching Screws

Inside Top Subframe
REMOVE 2 SHCS IN DRIVE REMOVE 2 SHCS ENCODER
SCREW BEARING BLOCK MOUNTING BLOCK
10. Loosen the 2 setscrews (1/16” hex key) that engage the encoder collar to the shaft as shown in
Figure 38‐4 on page 426. Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw to bring the
setscrews to an accessible position.

LOOSEN 2 SETSCREWS
IN COLLAR
11. If only the position encoder is being replaced, the absolute encoder can be left attached to the
mounting block. If only the absolute encoder is being replaced, remove the 2 encoder mounting
screws shown in Figure 38‐5 on page 427 and remove the encoder. The lead screw can be pulled out
slightly to get the inside screw out.
!
CAUTION: Do not pull the drive screw out any more than necessary. Pulling the drive screw out too
much may damage the drive screw
12. If only the absolute encoder is being replaced, skip to the Encoder Installation section, Step 3 on page
38‐429. If the Position encoder is being replaced, continue with this procedure.
Figure 38-5: Absolute Encoder Mounting
REMOVE 2 ENCODER
MOUNTING SHCS
13. Loosen the setscrews in the position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 38‐6 on page 428 (1/16” hex

key). Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw to bring the setscrews to an
accessible position.
14. Pull the drive screw out slightly until the encoder block clears the subframe and slide the position
encoder and mounting block (and absolute encoder, if it is still attached) off the shaft together.
15. Remove the 2 encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 38‐6 on page 428.
Figure 38-6: Position Encoder Mounting
LOOSEN 2 SET SCREWS REMOVE 2 MOUNTING SHCS
38.1.1 Encoder Installation

1. Loosely fasten the position encoder to it’s mounting block with the 2 screws as shown in Figure 38‐6
on page 428. The encoder attaching screws will be tightened later after the mounting and bearing
blocks have been attached and the encoder has been positioned.
2. Thread the encoder cable(s) through the subframe opening and slide the position encoder and
mounting block assembly onto the front end of the horizontal drive screw as shown in Figure 38‐6 on
page 428.
3. If a new absolute encoder is being installed, install the two bushings that come with the encoder into
the encoder, one on top of the other, so that the splits in the bushings are halfway between the
setscrew holes as shown in Figure 38‐7 on page 429.
Figure 38-7: Positioning Bushing in Absolute Encoder

SPLIT IN BUSHING
SETSCREW
HOLES
4. If the absolute is unmounted, thread its connector through the opening in the subframe and slide the
absolute encoder onto the front end of the horizontal drive screw.
5. Install but do not tighten the 2 absolute encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 38‐5 on page 427.
6. Install and tighten the 2 drive screw bearing block attaching SHCS as shown in Figure 38‐3 on
page 425.
7. Install and tighten the 2 SHCS to attach the absolute encoder mounting block to the upper subframe
8. Tighten the 2 position encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 38‐6 on page 428.
9. Tighten the setscrews in the position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 38‐6 on page 428.
10. Tighten the 2 absolute encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 38‐5 on page 427.
11. Tighten the setscrews that engage the absolute encoder collar to the shaft as shown in Figure 38‐4 on
page 426.
12. Connect the encoders.
13. Tie the encoder connectors up under the table as shown in Figure 38‐2 on page 424
15. Perform horizontal table calibration as follows:
a) Move the table top as far toward the head end as it will go (against the stops).
• Use any small device that will fit into the hole in the encoder (see Figure 38-8) and insert it into the
hole to press the reset button momentarily. The button on the encoder will normally be illuminated
green but when the reset button is pressed, it should turn red momentarily.
Figure 38-8: Horizontal Absolute Encoder Reset Button Location
RESET BUTTON IS INSIDE

THIS HOLE
Note: The ACS controller will not read the reset encoder value until the e‐stop is reset or the power to the table is cycled.
page 83.
Section 39
Section 39 Extended Support Absolute & Relative Position Encoders
Removal/Replacement
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal absolute and/or relative position encoders on
Ingenuity CT patient support units with long tops.
The horizontal absolute encoder and the relative position encoder are along left side of the patient
support top frame near the front as shown in Figure 39‐1 on page 434.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• Short Head 3/32‐inch hex key
Material Required: Loctite #222
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 39 Extended Support
Time Required:2 hrs
Figure 39-1: Long Support Horizontal Absolute and Relative Position Encoders

ABSOLUTE POSITION RELATIVE POSITION
ENCODER ENCODER
39.1 Removing the Encoders


page 80.
WARNING: Turn power off to the patient support before servicing. Hazardous voltages are inside. Failure
to do so may result in serious injury or death.
3. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
Power Down/Power Up” on page 36.
4. Remove the patient support LH, RH, and rear subframe covers.
6. Disconnect the absolute position encoder.
7. If the relative position encoder is to be replaced, disconnect it also.
Figure 39-2: Encoder Connectors Connection (under support top)
Figure 39‐3 on page 437. Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw to bring the
setscrews to an accessible position.
Figure 39-3: Absolute Position Encoder Setscrews

LOOSEN 2 SETSCREWS
IN COLLAR 1/16” HEX KEY)
9. Remove the 2 absolute encoder attaching screws (3/32” hex key) (see Figure 39‐4).
10. Pull the encoder off the shaft and pull the cable out of the table.
11. If only the absolute encoder is being replaced, skip to “Installing the Absolute Position Encoder” on
page 444. If the relative position encoder is being replaced, continue with the next step.
REMOVE 2 ENCODER
MOUNTING SHCS
12. Loosen the setscrews in the relative position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 39‐5 on page 439 (1/

16” hex key). Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw to bring the setscrews to an
13. Remove the 2 encoder mounting bracket screws shown in Figure 39‐5 on page 439.
14. Slide the position encoder and mounting block assembly off the shaft.
Figure 39-5: Relative Position Encoder Mounting

LOOSEN 2 SETSCREWS REMOVE 2 MOUNTING SCREWS
15. Remove the 2 encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 39‐6 on page 440 (3/32” hex key) and

remove the encoder from the mounting bracket.

REMOVE 2 MOUNTING SHCS
39.2 Installing the Encoders

39.2.1 Installing the Relative Position Encoder
1. Loosely fasten the new position encoder to it’s mounting bracket with the 2 SHCS with lockwashers
and flatwashers as shown in Figure 39‐7 on page 441 (3/32” hex key). The encoder attaching screws
need to be left loose to allow the encoder to center itself when installed. They will be tightened later
after the mounting bracket has been attached and the encoder is in the correct position.

INSTALL 2 MOUNTING SHCS WITH
LOCKWASHERS AND FLATWASHERS
2. Thread the encoder cable through the subframe opening and slide the position encoder and mounting
bracket assembly onto the front end of the horizontal drive screw as shown in Figure 39‐8 on
page 443.
3. Loosely install the 2 encoder mounting bracket screws shown in Figure 39‐8 on page 443.
4. Position the mounting bracket so that the top of the bracket is even with the top of the bearing block
and tighten the bracket mounting screws.
5. Tighten the 2 encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 39‐8 on page 443 (the inside SHCS will
require a short‐head 3/32” hex key).
6. Tighten the setscrews in the relative position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 39‐5 on page 439
(1/16” hex key). Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw to bring the setscrews to
an accessible position.
TIGHTEN 2 SETSCREWS TIGHTEN 2 SHCS BRACKET EVEN WITH

TOP OF BEARING BLOCK
INSTALL 2 SCREWS
39.2.2 Installing the Absolute Position Encoder

1. If a new absolute encoder is being installed, install the two bushings that come with the encoder into
the encoder, one on top of the other, so that the splits in the bushings are halfway between the
setscrew holes as shown in Figure 39‐9 on page 444.

SPLIT IN BUSHING
SETSCREW
HOLES
2. Thread the absolute encoder connector and cable through the opening in the subframe and slide the
3. Install and tighten the 2 absolute encoder mounting screws with lockwashers and flatwashers (see
Figure 39‐10).
4. Tighten the setscrews in the absolute position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 39‐5 on page 439.
INSTALL 2 ENCODER
MOUNTING SHCS
5. Connect the encoders (see Figure 39‐2).
6. Tie the encoder connectors up under the table as shown in.Figure 39‐2 on page 436
7. Turn ON power to the patient support. Refer to “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
WARNING: Stay clear of all powered items. Hazardous voltages will be present inside the patient
support. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
0) Move the table top as far toward the head end as it will go (against the stops).

THIS HOLE
page 83.
Section 40
Section 40 Standard Horizontal Drive Nut Removal / Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacing the horizontal drive screw nut assembly (P/N 4535 675 41421) on a
standard Brilliance patient support.
• For replacing a horizontal drive nut on a bariatric patient support, refer to the section (see ‘Bariatric
Horizontal Drive Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 478).
For replacing the horizontal drive screw and nut assembly together:
• For a standard patient support, refer to the section (see ‘Standard Horizontal Drive Screw Removal /
Replacement Procedure on page 465).
• For a bariatric patient support, refer to the section (see ‘Bariatric Horizontal Drive Screw Removal /
The horizontal drive nut rides on the horizontal drive screw which is mounted along the left side of the
patient support upper sub‐frame.
!
CAUTION: The horizontal drive nut is shipped encased in shrink-wrap to keep the parts of the assembly
oriented properly (see Figure 40-1). Make sure not to remove the shrink-wrap from the drive
nut until it is installed on the drive screw. If the shrink-wrap is removed before the nut is
installed on the drive screw, special reassembly procedures are required and reassembly
instructions are not provided. If the shrink-wrap does come off the nut before it is installed,
order a replacement nut assembly.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• 1 in. spanner wrench
Material Required:
• Horizontal drive screw nut assembly P/N 4535 675 41421 (see Figure 40‐1)
• Wooden block, approximately 6 in. long, approximately 3 in. wide and 3/4” to 1” thick
(approximately 15 cm long, approximately 8 cm wide and 18 mm to 25mm thick)
Figure 40-1: Replacement Shrink‐Wrapped Horizontal Drive Nut Shipped On a Shaft Segment

(Assembly P/N 4535 675 41421)
40.1 Drive Nut Removal

on page 80.
WARNING THE VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT BRACE MUST BE INSTALLED

WHENEVER PERSONNEL ARE WORKING UNDER THE TABLE. FAILURE
TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY OR DEATH.
WARNING: hazardous voltages ARE inside. TURN OFF POWER supplies before servicing. failure to do so
5. Remove the clutch according to the procedure “Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Removal” on
page 382.
6. Remove the key from the screw keyway (see Figure 40‐2).
7. Bend the locking ring tab out of the spanner nut slot (see Figure 40‐2).
8. Unscrew the spanner nut from the drive screw.
Figure 40-2: Drive Screw Foot‐End Bearing Block
BEND LOCKING TAB FOOT-END BEARING BLOCK REMOVE KEY

OUT OF SPANNER NUT SLOT (BOLTS ON OTHER SIDE OF
SUBFRAME)
Note: Make sure to note the locations of any shims that are between the bearing block and the subframe so they can be
restored to the original positions during assembly.
9. Remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws (under the table inside the upper
subfarme) shown in Figure 40‐3 on page 452.
10. Slide the bearing block and the 2 spacer rings off the drive screw. Keep the spacer rings for re‐use.
Figure 40-3: Drive Screw Foot‐End Bearing Block Attaching Screws

(Under Table Inside Upper Subframe)
DRIVE SCREW FOOT-END

BEARING BLOCK ATTACHING
SCREWS
11. Using a 5/32 in. hex key remove the 3 screws attaching the drive screw nut to the linkage as shown in
Figure 40‐4 on page 453 (the third screw in the back is hidden in the picture). Leave the nut on the
drive screw.
Figure 40-4: Linkage to Drive Screw Nut Attaching Screws

REMOVE 3 SHCS DRIVE SCREW NUT
(ONE HIDDEN BEHIND NUT)
LINKAGE
12. While making sure that the drive nut remains resting on the subframe, move the table top to the head
end as shown in Figure 40‐5 on page 454.
13. Place a screwdriver in the subframe hole as shown in Figure 40‐5 on page 454 to prevent the drive
screw from falling off the subframe and becoming bent when the nut is removed.
Figure 40-5: Table Top Moved To Head End ‐ Drive Screw Supported
TABLE TOP POSITIONED

TOWARD HEAD END
SCREWDRIVER IN
SUBFRAME HOLE
14. Place a 3/4 to 1” thick wooden block under the drive screw as shown in Figure 40‐6 on page 455 to

support it an prevent the drive screw from bending.
15. Remove drive nut from the drive screw.
Figure 40-6: Block Placement to Support the Drive Screw
BLOCK TO SUPPORT
THE DRIVE SCREW
40.2 Drive Nut Installation
!
!
CAUTION: Make sure not to apply any type of lubricant to the drive screw. Lubricants will cause the
horizontal drive to malfunction.
1. Leave the shrink‐wrap on the drive nut, screw it off the shaft segment that it is shipped on, and screw
it onto the horizontal drive screw (see Figure 40‐7).
2. Remove the shrink‐wrap after the nut is installed.
!
CAUTION: Make sure not to remove the drive nut from the drive screw once the shrink-wrap is
removed from the nut. If the nut comes off the drive screw after the shrink-wrap is
removed, special reassembly procedures are required and reassembly instructions are not
provided. If the nut does come off the screw after the shrink-wrap is removed, order a
replacement nut assembly.
Figure 40-7: Horizontal Drive Nut Installed on Drive Screw (shown with shrink‐wrap removed)
3. Move the table top toward the foot end, removing the screwdriver when needed, and the wooden
block when needed until the linkage reaches the nut as shown in Figure 40‐8 on page 458.
4. Apply Loctite #222 to the 3, #10‐32 x 0.625 in SHCS and install them with flat washers (5/32 in. hex
key) to attach the drive nut to the linkage. Leave the screws just loose enough to allow the nut to
move relative to the linkage. These screws will be tightened later.
Figure 40-8: Attaching the Drive Screw to the Linkage at Table Foot End
INSTALL 3 SHCS DRIVE SCREW NUT

TOP LINKAGE
5. Install one of the spacer rings removed during disassembly onto the drive screw as shown in
Figure 40-9: Spacer Installed on Drive Screw
INSTALL SPACER RING

ON DRIVE SCREW
6. Install the foot‐end bearing block onto the end of the drive screw as shown in Figure 40‐9 on page 459.

7. If any shims were present between the bearing block and the subframe during disassembly, put them
back in their original locations.
8. Apply Loctite #242 to the 2 1/4 x 20 x 0.5 in. SHCS and install them with flat washers to attach the
bearing. Leave the bolts loose enough to allow movement of the bearing block.
Figure 40-10: Foot‐End Bearing Block Installed
9. Install the spacer ring, locking ring, and spanner nut onto the drive screw as shown in Figure 40‐11 on
page 461.
Figure 40-11: Spacer, Locking Ring, and Spanner Nut Installed on Drive Screw

INSTALL SPACER RING, LOCK RING,
& SPANNER NUT
10. Tighten the spanner nut enough to remove all lateral play of the shaft in the bearing. Do not tighten
the nut to put force against the bearing.
11. Back the nut off just enough so that one of the nut’s slots aligns with one of the lock ring tabs, and
bend the tab into the nut slot as shown in Figure 40‐12 on page 462.
Figure 40-12: Locking Ring Tab Engaged into Spanner Nut Slot

BEND LOCK RING TAB
INTO SPANNER NUT SLOT
12. Move the tabletop all the way to the head end so that the top linkage is next to the head‐end bearing
block as shown in Figure 40‐13 on page 463. This will make the drive nut align with the head‐end
bearing block which is still in it’s original position. Torque the 3 screws attaching the drive nut to the
linkage to 8 in‐lbs (0.9 N‐m).
Figure 40-13: Drive Nut Positioned at Head End for Tightening Screws to Linkage

LINKAGE NEXT TO BEARING BLOCK
13. Move the tabletop all the way to the foot end so that the top linkage is next to the foot‐end bearing
block (which should still be loose enough to move up and down). This will make the foot‐end bearing
block align with the drive nut. Tighten the bearing block bolts.
14. Move the table top back an forth over the length of it’s travel to make sure it moves freely over the
entire travel with no binding. If binding occurs, refer to the section “Top Horizontal Force Adjustment
Procedure” on page 613.
15. If the top moves freely over its entire travel, torque the foot‐end bearing block bolts to 11 ft‐lbs (14 N‐
m).
16. Install the clutch according to the procedure “Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Installation” on
page 387.
page 83.
Section 41
Section 41 Standard Horizontal Drive Screw Removal /
This procedure is for the replacement of the standard Brilliance patient support horizontal drive screw
assembly P/N 4535 670 28971. For replacing a horizontal drive screw on a bariatric patient support, refer
to the section (see ‘Bariatric Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 506).
The horizontal drive screw is mounted along the left side of the patient support upper frame.
!
CAUTION: The drive screw is shipped with the drive nut assembly installed. Make sure not to remove
the drive nut from the drive screw. If removed, special reassembly procedures are required
and assembly instructions are not provided. If the nut does come off the drive screw, order
a replacement drive nut assembly that is pre-set. See the section “Standard Horizontal Drive
Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure” on page 448.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Loctite #222
41.1 Drive Screw Removal

on page 80.

5. Remove the clutch according to the procedure “Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Removal” on
page 382.
6. Remove the horizontal absolute encoder and the horizontal brake according to the section (see
7. Remove the horizontal relative position encoder according to the section (see ‘Std Horizontal Relative
Position Encoder Replacement on page 415).
8. Remove the head end drive screw bearing block attaching screws shown in Figure 41‐1 on page 467.
Figure 41-1: Drive Screw Head‐End Bearing Block Attaching Screws

DRIVE SCREW HEAD-END

SCREWS
41.1.1 Subframe Cover Removal

In order to get to one of the drive screw linkage screws the upper subframe cover (see Figure ) will need
to be detached and moved to the head end.
Figure 41-2: Upper Subframe Cover
UPPER SUBFRAME COVER
1. Remove 5 screws along each side of the underside of the subframe that attach the subframe top cover.
The 2 screws under the head end are shown in Figure 41‐3 on page 469 for an example. The other 8
screws are in similar locations along each side. The top can be moved as needed to gain access to the
drive screw linkage screws.
Figure 41-3: Head‐End Subframe Cover Screws

(Viewed from Underneath)

ATTACHING SCREWS
41.1.2 Drive Screw Removal

1. Bend the locking tabs out of the slots on the spanner nuts on each end of the drive screw, loosen and
remove the nuts (see Figure 41‐4).
Figure 41-4: Drive Screw Spanner Nut (Head End)
SPANNER NUT
LOCKING TAB
2. Remove the 2 accessible screws attaching the drive screw nut to the linkage as shown in Figure 41‐5
on page 471 (the third screw in the back will be removed later).
REMOVE SHCS DRIVE SCREW NUT
LINKAGE
3. The screws that attach the linkage have locking setscrews which must be loosened before the linkage
screws can be removed (see Figure 41‐7). Use a 5/64” hex key to loosen the 2 linkage screw locking
setscrews as shown in Figure 41‐7 on page 473.
Figure 41-6: Drive Screw Linkage Attachment Screw Locking Setscrew
5/64” HEX KEY TO LOOSEN LINKAGE

SCREW LOCKING SETSCREW
DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

LOWER ATTACHING SCREW
4. Mark the position of the top support bracket on the drive screw linkage as shown in Figure 41‐7 on
page 473.
5. Remove the 2 socket head cap screws (SCHS) that attach the linkage to the top support bracket as
Figure 41-7: Drive Screw Linkage Attaching Screws
SUBFRAME COVER
DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

ATTACHING SCREWS
MARK POSITION OF
TOP SUPPORT BRACKET
ON DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE
6. Move the nut and linkage assembly away from the top support bracket enough so it can be tilted out
as shown in Figure 41‐8 on page 474. Remove the remaining linkage to nut attaching screw.
7. Remove the linkage.
Figure 41-8: Remaining Linkage to Drive Screw Nut Attaching Screw
REMOVE REMAINING
SCREW
8. Remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws from under the inside of the top
subframe as shown in Figure 41‐9 on page 475.
9. Remove the lead screw and bearing block assemblies.
10. Slide the bearing block assemblies off of each end of the drive screw.
Figure 41-9: Foot‐End Drive Screw Bearing Block Attaching Screws
BEARING BLOCK SCREWS
41.2 Drive Screw Installation
!
a replacement drive nut assembly that is pre-set. See the section “Standard Horizontal Drive
Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure” on page 448.
Note: Make sure not to apply any type of lubricant to the drive screw. Lubricants will cause the horizontal drive to
malfunction.
1. Slide a bearing block assembly onto each end of the drive screw.
2. Loosely install the spanner nuts on each end to hold the bearing blocks on the drive screw.
3. Install the drive screw and bearing block assembly onto the couch.
4. Apply Loctite #242 to the 2, 1/4 x 20 x 0.5 in. SHCS and install them with flat washers to attach the
bearing blocks to the subframe. Leave the bolts loose enough to allow movement of the bearing block.
5. Install the linkage assembly to the nut in the position shown in Figure 41‐8 on page 474. Apply
Loctite #425 to one screw and install it to attach the drive linkage to the drive nut.
6. Swivel the linkage up into position as shown in Figure 41‐7 on page 473. Apply Loctite #242 to the
screws and loosely attach the linkage to the top support bracket with 2 screws.
7. Apply Loctite #425 and install the remaining 2 linkage to drive screw nut screws as shown in
8. Center the drive screw nut to the linkage flange and tighten 3 drive nut screws to 8 in‐lbs (0.9 N‐m).
9. Position the linkage so that the mark on the linkage made during disassembly aligns with the top
support bracket (see Figure 41‐7 on page 473) and tighten the screws.
10. Move the couch top all the way to the foot end so that the drive screw nut is next to the foot‐end
bearing block. The top should move freely. If it begins to bind as the nut approaches the foot‐end,
loosen the linkage screws slightly, move the top all the way to the foot end and retighten the linkage
screws. Check that the top now moves without binding.
11. When the carbon top moves over it’s full travel without binding, torque the drive nut linkage screws
to 10 in‐lb (1.1 N‐m).
12. Tighten the 2 linkage screw locking setscrews (5/64” hex key) (see Figure 41‐7 on page 473).
13. With the couch top all the way to the foot end (with the drive screw nut next to the foot‐end bearing
block), torque the foot‐end bearing block bolts to 11 ft‐lbs (14 N‐m)
14. Install and tighten the spanner nuts on each end of the drive screw. Lock each spanner nut by bending
one of the locking tabs that is aligned with a notch into the notch (see Figure 41‐4 on page 470).
15. Install the horizontal relative position encoder according to the procedure (see ‘Standard Horizontal
Relative Position Encoder Installation on page 420) in the Std Horizontal Relative Position Encoder
Replacement on page 415 section.
16. Install the horizontal absolute encoder and the horizontal brake according to the procedure (see
‘Standard Horizontal Brake Installation on page 373) in the section Standard Horizontal Brake
Replacement Procedure on page 367.
17. Install the clutch according to the procedure “Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Installation” on
page 387.
page 83.
Section 42
Section 42 Bariatric Horizontal Drive Nut Removal / Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacing the horizontal drive screw nut assembly (P/N 4535 675 41421) on a
Brilliance bariatric patient support.
• For replacing a horizontal drive nut on a standard patient support, refer to the section “Standard
Horizontal Drive Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure” on page 448.
For replacing the horizontal drive screw and nut assembly together:
• For a standard patient support, refer to the section (see ‘Standard Horizontal Drive Screw Removal /
• For a bariatric patient support, refer to the section (see ‘Bariatric Horizontal Drive Screw Removal /
!
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 42 Bariatric Horizontal
Material Required:
• Wooden block, approximately 6 in. long, approximately 3 in. wide and 3/4” to 1” thick
(approximately 15 cm long, approximately 8 cm wide and 18 mm to 25mm thick)

(Assembly P/N 4535 675 41421)

42.1.1 Belt Removal
2. Place the patient support covers into the service position according to the procedure “Placing Lower
on page 80.

6. Use a 3/16” hex key to remove the 5 SHCS attaching the rear brace and brake mounting bracket as
shown in Figure 42‐2 on page 481 and remove the brace.
Figure 42-2: Horizontal Clutch and Brake Connections

BRAKE CONNECTION

page 482.

SCREW

(5/32” HEX KEY) (5/32” HEX KEY)
42.1.2 Brake and Clutch Removal


BRAKE HUB

REMOVE SETSCREWS

SUBFRAME)
9. Remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws (under the table inside the upper
subfarme) shown in Figure 42‐7 on page 486.
10. Slide the bearing block and the 2 spacer rings off the drive screw. Keep the spacer rings for re‐use.


SCREWS
Figure 42‐8 on page 487 (the third screw in the back is hidden in the picture). Leave the nut on the
drive screw.

LINKAGE

TOWARD HEAD END
SCREWDRIVER IN
SUBFRAME HOLE
14. Place a 3/4 to 1” thick wooden block under the drive screw as shown in Figure 42‐10 on page 489 to

BLOCK TO SUPPORT
THE DRIVE SCREW
42.2Drive Nut Installation
!
!
!
Figure 42-11: Horizontal Drive Nut Installed on Drive Screw (shown with shrink‐wrap removed)
3. Move the table top toward the foot end, removing the screwdriver when needed, and the wooden
block when needed until the linkage reaches the nut as shown in Figure 42‐12 on page 492.

TOP LINKAGE
5. Install one of the spacer rings removed during disassembly onto the drive screw as shown in
Figure 42-13: Spacer Installed on Drive Screw

INSTALL SPACER RING
ON DRIVE SCREW
6. Install the foot‐end bearing block onto the end of the drive screw as shown in Figure 42‐13 on
page 493.
9. Install the spacer ring, locking ring, and spanner nut onto the drive screw as shown in Figure 42‐15 on
page 495.
Figure 42-15: Spacer, Locking Ring, and Spanner Nut Installed on Drive Screw

INSTALL SPACER RING, LOCK RING,
& SPANNER NUT
the nut so that it puts force against the bearing.
11. Back the nut off just enough so that one of the nut’s slots aligns with one of the lock ring tabs, and
bend the tab into the nut slot as shown in Figure 42‐16 on page 496.

BEND LOCK RING TAB
bearing block which is still in it’s original position. Torque the 3 screws attaching the drive nut to the
linkage to 8 in‐lbs (0.9 N‐m).
block align with the drive nut. Tighten the foot‐end bearing block bolts.
entire travel with no binding. If binding occurs, refer to the section “Top Horizontal Force Adjustment
Procedure” on page 613.
15. If the top moves freely over its entire travel, torque the foot‐end bearing block bolts to 11 ft‐lbs
(14 N‐m).
Figure 42-17: Drive Nut Positioned at Head End Bearing Block for Tightening Screws to Linkage

(standard couch shown ‐ bariatric is similar)
LINKAGE NEXT TO HEAD-END BEARING BLOCK
42.2.1 Installing the Clutch and Brake

1. Place the key in the drive screw keyway and slide the clutch onto the shaft and through the belt. Push
the clutch onto the shaft as far as it will go until it is tight against the shoulder on the shaft as shown

BRAKE HUB AGAINST
SHAFT SHOULDER
INSTALL SETSCREWS
4. Install the brake and mounting plate assembly onto the drive shaft.
5. Apply Loctite #242 to the 5 ‐ 1/4‐20 x 3/4 in. SHCS (3/16” hex key) and attach the rear brace and brake
mounting plate as shown in Figure 42‐19 on page 501.
6. Torque the screws to 11 ft‐lbs (15 N‐m).
7. Connect the leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 42‐19 on page 501.
8. Connect the MOV and the brake wires as shown in Figure 42‐19 on page 501. Tie the clutch and brake
leads to the rear brace with cable ties.

CLUTCH CONNECTIONS INSTALL 5 SHCS
BRAKE CONNECTION
11. Using a 3/16” hex key socket, remove the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in
Figure 42‐20 on page 503 one at a time, apply Loctite #242, and reinstall them.
12. Torque the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in Figure 42‐20 on page 503 to 11 ft‐lbs
(15 N‐m).
13. Using a 5/32” hex key socket, torque the 4 motor mounting SHCS shown in Figure 42‐20 on page 503
to 15 in‐lbs (1.7 N‐m) (there are holes in the bearing plate to allow hex key access to the upper two
motor mounting SHCS).

SCREW

(5/32” HEX KEY) (5/32” HEX KEY)
14. Apply Loctite #222 to the brake plate hub set screws and partially install them into the hub (see
Figure 42‐21).
16. Place a 0.010” feeler gage between the brake and the brake plate. Slide the plate up against the feeler
gage so there is a 0.010” gap between the plate and the brake all the way around (see Figure 42‐21).
Tighten the setscrews in the hub.
INSTALL SET SCREWS IN SET GAP AT 0.010

BRAKE HUB
page 83.
Section 43
Section 43 Bariatric Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the Brilliance Bariatric patient support horizontal drive screw P/
N 4535 673 95101. For replacing a horizontal drive screw on a standard patient support, refer to the
section (see ‘Standard Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 465).
The horizontal drive screw is mounted along the left side of the patient support upper frame.
!
a new drive screw nut assembly that is pre-set. Refer to the section “Bariatric Horizontal
Drive Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure” on page 478.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Loctite #222

43.1.1 Belt Removal
on page 80.


BRAKE CONNECTION

page 509.

SCREW

(5/32” HEX KEY) (5/32” HEX KEY)


BRAKE HUB

REMOVE SETSCREWS
43.1.3 Encoder Removal

2. Disconnect both encoders.
Figure 43-5: Encoder Connectors Connection
3. To remove the position encoder, remove the two bolts in from under the upper subframe that attach
the encoder mounting block to the upper subframe as shown in Figure 43‐6 on page 513.
4. Remove the two bolts in from under the upper subframe that attach the head‐end drive screw bearing
block to the upper subframe as shown in Figure 43‐6 on page 513. This will allow the drive screw to
be pulled away from the subframe to get to the absolute encoder mounting screws.
5. Loosen the two SHCS attaching the foot‐end drive screw bearing block to the subframe (to allow
movement of the drive screw).
Figure 43-6: Encoder Mounting Block and Drive Screw Bearing Block Attaching Screws

Inside Top Subframe
REMOVE 2 SHCS IN DRIVE REMOVE 2 SHCS IN ABSOLUTE
SCREW BEARING BLOCK ENCODER MOUNTING BLOCK
6. Loosen the 2 setscrews (1/16” hex key) that engage the absolute encoder collar to the shaft as shown in
Figure 43‐7 on page 514. Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw make the
setscrews accessible.

LOOSEN 2 SETSCREWS
IN COLLAR
7. Loosen the setscrews in the position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 43‐8 on page 515 (1/16” hex

8. Pull the drive screw out slightly until the encoder block clears the subframe and slide both encoders
and the mounting block off the shaft together.
Figure 43-8: Position Encoder Setscrew
LOOSEN 2 SET SCREWS

The 2 screws under the head end are shown in Figure 43‐10 on page 517 for an example. The other 8
screws are in similar locations along each side. The top can be moved as needed to gain access to the
screws.


ATTACHING SCREWS

1. Bend the locking tabs out of the slots on the spanner nuts on each end of the drive screw, loosen and
remove the nuts (see Figure 43‐11).
Figure 43-11: Drive Screw Spanner Nut
SPANNER NUT
LOCKING TAB
2. Remove the 2 accessible screws attaching the drive screw nut to the linkage as shown in Figure 43‐12
on page 519 (the third screw in the back will be removed later).
LINKAGE
3. The screws that attach the linkage have locking setscrews which must be loosened before the linkage
screws can be removed (see Figure 43‐14). Use a 5/64” hex key to loosen the 2 linkage screw locking
setscrews as shown in Figure 43‐14 on page 521.
Figure 43-13: Drive Screw Linkage Attachment Screw Locking Setscrew

DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

4. Mark the position of the top support bracket on the drive screw linkage as shown in Figure 43‐14 on
page 521.
5. Remove the SCHS that attach the linkage to the top support bracket as shown in Figure 43‐14 on
page 521.
SUBFRAME COVER
DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

ATTACHING SCREWS
MARK POSITION OF
TOP SUPPORT BRACKET
as shown in Figure 43‐15 on page 522. Remove the remaining linkage to nut attaching screw.
REMOVE REMAINING
SCREW
8. Remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws from under the inside of the top
subframe as shown in Figure 43‐16 on page 523.
!
a new drive screw nut assembly that is pre-set. Refer to the section “Bariatric Horizontal
Drive Nut Removal / Replacement Procedure” on page 478.
Note: Make sure not to apply grease to the drive screw. Grease will cause the horizontal drive to malfunction.
1. Slide a bearing block assembly onto each end of the drive screw.
4. Apply Loctite #242 to the 2, 1/4 x 20 x 0.5 in. SHCS and install them with flat washers to attach the
bearing block to the subframe. Leave the bolts loose enough to allow movement of the bearing block.
5. Install the linkage assembly to the nut in the position shown in Figure 43‐15 on page 522. Apply
Loctite #425 to one linkage to nut attaching screw and install it.
6. Swivel the linkage up into position as shown in Figure 43‐14 on page 43‐521. Apply Loctite #242 to
the screws and loosely attach the linkage to the top support bracket with two screws.
7. Apply Loctite #425 to 2 remaining linkage to nut attaching screws and install them into the drive nut
(see Figure 43‐12 on page 519).
8. Center the drive nut to the linkage flange and torque the 3 screws to 8 in‐lbs (0.9 N‐m).
9. Position the linkage so that the mark on the linkage made during disassembly aligns with the top
support bracket (see Figure 43‐14) and tighten the screws.
bearing block. The top should move freely. If it begins to bind as the nut approaches the foot‐end,
loosen the linkage screws slightly, move the top all the way to the foot end and retighten the linkage
screws. Check that the top now moves without binding.
11. When the carbon top moves over it’s full travel without binding, torque the drive nut linkage screws
to 10 in‐lb (1.1 N‐m).
12. Tighten the 2 linkage screw locking setscrews (5/64” hex key) (see Figure 43‐14 on page 521).
block), torque the foot‐end bearing block screws to 11 ft‐lbs (14 N‐m).
14. Install and tighten the spanner nuts on each end of the drive screw. Lock each spanner nut by bending
one of the locking tabs that is aligned with a notch into the notch (see Figure 43‐11 on page 518).
43.2.1 Encoder Installation
!
CAUTION: Do not pull the drive screw away from the couch any more than necessary to install the
encoders. Pulling the drive screw out too much may damage the drive screw
1. Thread both encoder cables through the subframe opening and slide the encoder and mounting block
assembly onto the front end of the horizontal drive screw as shown in Figure 43‐7 on page 514.
2. Move the couch top all the way to the head end so the drive screw drive nut is next to the head‐end
drive screw bearing block. The top should move freely to this position.
If the top becomes more difficult to move as it approaches the head end, the height of the drive screw
linkage and the height of the foot‐end drive screw bearing block must be readjusted. Make several
iterations of this adjustment until the couch top can go from end to end without binding.
3. With the couch top all the way to the head end (so the drive screw drive nut is next to the head‐end
drive screw bearing block), tighten the 2 drive screw head‐end bearing block attaching SHCS as
4. Use a 5/64” hex key to tighten the 2 linkage screw locking setscrews as shown in Figure 43‐14 on
page 521.
5. Install and tighten the 2 SHCS to attach the encoder mounting block to the upper subframe as shown
6. Tighten the setscrews in the position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 43‐8 on page 515.
7. Tighten the setscrews that engage the absolute encoder collar to the shaft as shown in Figure 43‐7 on
page 514.
8. Connect the encoders.
9. Tie the encoder connectors up under the table as shown in.Figure 43‐5 on page 512.

10. Move the subframe cover back into position and install all of the attaching screws.

the clutch onto the shaft until it is tight against the shoulder on the shaft.
4. Install the brake and mounting plate assembly onto the drive shaft.
5. Attach the rear brace with 4 SHCS as shown in Figure 43‐1 on page 507.
7. Adjust the tension of the belt using the sonic tension meter (see “Checking Horizontal Drive Belt
Tension” on page 707).
page 509.
12. Place a 0.010” feeler gage between the brake and the brake plate. Slide the plate up against the feeler
gage so there is a 0.010” gap between the plate and the brake all the way around. Tighten the
setscrews in the hub.
13. Connect the MOV and the leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 43‐1 on page 507.
14. Connect the brake wires as shown in Figure 43‐1 on page 507. Tie the clutch and brake leads to the
rear brace with cable ties.
page 83.
a) Move the table top as far toward the head end as it will go (against the stops).

THIS HOLE
Section 44
Section 44 Extended Support Horizontal Drive Nut Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacing the horizontal drive screw nut assembly on a long patient support.
For replacing the horizontal drive screw and nut assembly together, refer to the section “Extended
Support Horizontal Drive Screw Replacement Procedure” on page 557.
!
CAUTION: Make sure not to remove the shrink-wrap from the drive nut until it is installed on the drive
screw. The horizontal drive nut is shipped encased in shrink-wrap to keep the parts of the
assembly oriented properly (see Figure 44-1). If the shrink-wrap is removed before the nut
is installed on the drive screw, special reassembly procedures are required and reassembly
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Nylon Alignment Block (P/N 4598 000 46541)

(Assembly P/N 4535 675 41421)

44.1.1 Belt Removal
2. Place the patient support covers into the service position according to the procedure “Placing Lower

on page 80.
Procedure, either
5.
6. “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on page 36 or “Brilliance
iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up” on page 48.
7. Cut the cable ties on the rear brace and disconnect the leads to the brake as shown in Figure 44‐2.
8. Use a 3/16” hex key to remove the 5 SHCS attaching the rear brace and brake mounting plate as
shown in
Figure 44‐2 and remove the brace.
Figure 44-2: Rear Brace and Horizontal Brake Connections

REMOVE 3 SHCS DISCONNECT REMOVE 2 SHCS
BRAKE

2. Remove the brake and brake mounting plate as an assembly Figure 44‐3.
4. Disconnect the leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 44‐3.

BRAKE MOUNTING PLATE DISCONNECT
CLUTCH LEADS

BRAKE HUB
5. Use a 3/16” hex key to loosen the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in Figure 44‐4.
6. Loosen the belt adjusting screw as required (see Figure 44‐4) and slide the motor mounting plate to
the left until the mounting bolts are at the ends of the slots.
4 MOTOR MOUNTING PLATE SHCS BELT ADJUSTING

(3/16” HEX KEY) SCREW
7. Loosen the setscrews in the clutch collar as shown in Figure 44‐5.
REMOVE SETSCREWS

SUBFRAME)
12. Remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws (3/16” hex key ‐under the table
inside the upper subfarme) shown in Figure 44‐7.
13. Slide the bearing block and the 2 sleeves off the drive screw. Keep the sleeves for re‐use.


SCREWS
Figure 44‐8 (the third screw in the back is hidden in the picture). Leave the nut on the drive screw.

LINKAGE

TOWARD HEAD END
SCREWDRIVER IN
SUBFRAME HOLE
17. Place the nylon alignment block under the drive screw as shown in Figure 44‐10 on page 540 to

BLOCK TO SUPPORT
THE DRIVE SCREW
44.2 Drive Nut Installation
!
CAUTION: Make sure not to remove the shrink-wrap from the drive nut until it is installed on the drive
screw. The horizontal drive nut is shipped encased in shrink-wrap to keep the parts of the
assembly oriented properly (see Figure 44-1). If the shrink-wrap is removed before the nut
is installed on the drive screw, special reassembly procedures are required and reassembly
!
!
Figure 44-11: Horizontal Drive Nut Installed on Drive Screw

(shown with shrink‐wrap removed)
3. Move the table top toward the foot end, removing the screwdriver when needed, and the support
block when needed until the linkage reaches the nut as shown in Figure 44‐12.

TOP LINKAGE
5. Install one of the sleeves removed during disassembly onto the drive screw as shown in Figure 44‐13.
Figure 44-13: Sleeve Installed on Drive Screw
INSTALL SLEEVE
ON DRIVE SCREW
6. Install the foot‐end bearing block onto the end of the drive screw as shown in Figure 44‐13.
9. Install the sleeve, locking ring, and spanner nut onto the drive screw as shown in Figure 44‐15.
Figure 44-15: Sleeve, Locking Ring, and Spanner Nut Installed on Drive Screw

INSTALL SLEEVE, LOCK RING, &
SPANNER NUT
the nut so that it puts force against the bearing.
11. Tighten (not loosen) the spanner nut just enough more so that one of the nut’s slots aligns with one of
the lock ring tabs, and bend the tab into the nut slot as shown in Figure 44‐16.

BEND LOCK RING TAB
bearing block which is still in it’s original position.
Figure 44-17: Drive Nut Positioned at Head End Bearing Block for Tightening Screws to Linkage

LINKAGE NEXT TO TORQUE (3) TO 10 IN-LBS (1.1 N-m)
HEAD-END BEARING BLOCK
13. Place the nylon alignment block under the middle of the drive screw as shown in Figure 44‐18 to

support it and prevent the drive screw from bending.
14. Torque the 3 screws attaching the drive nut to the linkage to 8 in‐lbs (0.9 N‐m) (Figure 44‐17 on
page 548).
BLOCK TO SUPPORT
THE DRIVE SCREW
block align with the drive nut. Tighten the foot‐end bearing block bolts.
entire travel with no binding. If binding occurs, refer to the section Top Horizontal Force Adjustment
Procedure on page 613.
17. If the top moves freely over its entire travel, torque the foot‐end bearing block bolts to 11 ft‐lbs (14 N‐
m) (3/16” hex key).

2. Apply Loctite #222 to the setscrews and install them into the clutch collar as shown in Figure 44‐19
and tighten them snugly.
INSTALL SETSCREWS
4. Install the brake and mounting plate assembly onto the drive shaft (see Figure 44‐20).
5. Connect the MOV and power leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 44‐20.

BRAKE MOUNTING PLATE CONNECT CLUTCH &
MOV LEADS
6. Attach the rear brace with 5 SHCS as shown in Figure 44‐21.

INSTALL 3 SHCS CONNECT INSTALL 2 SHCS
BRAKE
8. Adjust the tension of the belt using the sonic tension meter (see “Checking Horizontal Drive Belt
Tension” on page 707).
9. Using a 3/16” hex key, tighten the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws (see Figure 44‐22).

12. Place a 0.015” feeler gage between the brake and the brake plate (see Figure 44‐23). Slide the plate up
against the feeler gage so there is a 0.015” gap between the plate and the brake all the way around.
While holding the feeler gage tightly sandwiched between the brake plate and the brake, tighten the
setscrews in the brake plate hub.
Figure 44-23: Setting the Brake Plate Air Gap
0.015” FEELER GAGE
13. Connect the brake wires (see Figure 44‐2 on page 532).

14. Tie the clutch and brake leads to the rear brace with cable ties.
page 83.
Section 45
Section 45 Extended Support Horizontal Drive Screw Replacement
Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the long top patient support horizontal drive screw. The
horizontal drive screw is mounted along the left side of the patient support upper frame.
!
CAUTION: Make sure not to remove the drive nut from the drive screw. The drive screw is shipped with
the drive nut assembly installed. If removed, special reassembly procedures are required
a new drive screw nut assembly that is pre-set. Refer to the section “Extended Support
Horizontal Drive Nut Replacement Procedure” on page 529.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• 2 ‐ Lead Screw Aligning Brackets P/N 4598 000 81341
Material Required:
• Horizontal Drive Screw Assy
• Loctite #222 & #242

45.1.1 Belt Removal

on page 80.
5. Cut the cable ties on the rear brace and disconnect the leads to the brake as shown in Figure 45‐1.
6. Use a 3/16” hex key to remove the 5 SHCS attaching the rear brace and brake mounting plate as
shown in
Figure 45‐1 and remove the brace.

REMOVE 3 SHCS DISCONNECT REMOVE 2 SHCS
BRAKE

2. Remove the brake and brake mounting plate as an assembly Figure 45‐2.
4. Disconnect the leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 45‐2.

BRAKE MOUNTING PLATE DISCONNECT
CLUTCH LEADS

BRAKE HUB
5. Use a 3/16” hex key to loosen the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws shown in Figure 45‐3.
6. Loosen the belt adjusting screw as required (see Figure 45‐3) and slide the motor mounting plate to
the left until the mounting bolts are at the ends of the slots.

7. Loosen the setscrews in the clutch collar as shown in Figure 45‐4.
REMOVE SETSCREWS

SUBFRAME)
45.1.3 Encoder Removal

Figure 45‐6.
2. Disconnect the absolute position encoder.
3. If the relative position encoder is to be replaced, disconnect it also.
Figure 45-6: Encoder Connectors Connection (under support top)
Figure 45‐7. Move the table top slightly as needed to turn the drive screw to bring the setscrews to an
Figure 45-7: Absolute Position Encoder Setscrews

LOOSEN 2 SETSCREWS
IN COLLAR 1/16” HEX KEY)
5. Remove the 2 absolute encoder attaching screws (3/32” hex key) (see Figure 45‐8).
6. Pull the encoder off the shaft and pull the cable out of the table.
REMOVE 2 ENCODER
MOUNTING SHCS
7. Loosen the setscrews in the relative position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 45‐9 (1/16” hex
8. Remove the 2 encoder mounting bracket screws shown in Figure 45‐9.
9. Slide the position encoder and mounting block assembly off the shaft.

LOOSEN 2 SETSCREWS REMOVE 2 MOUNTING SCREWS
10. Bend the locking tabs out of the slots on the spanner nut on the foot‐end of the drive screw, loosen,
and remove the nut (see Figure 45‐10).
Figure 45-10: Foot‐End Drive Screw Spanner Nut
SPANNER NUT
LOCKING TAB

The 2 screws under the head end are shown in Figure 45‐12 for an example. The other 8 screws are in
similar locations along each side. The top can be moved as needed to gain access to the screws.


ATTACHING SCREWS

1. Using a 5/32” hex key, remove the 2 accessible screws attaching the drive screw nut to the linkage as
shown in Figure 45‐13 (the third screw in the back will be removed later).
LINKAGE
2. On older model tables with linkage shown in Figure 45‐14 disconnect the linkage as follows:
a) Use a 5/64” hex key to loosen the 2 linkage screw locking setscrews as shown in Figure 45-14.
Figure 45-14: Older Model Drive Screw Linkage Attachment Screw Locking Setscrew

DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

• Mark the position of the top support bracket on the drive screw linkage as shown in Figure 45-15.
• Remove the SCHS that attach the linkage to the top support bracket as shown in Figure 45-15.
Figure 45-15: Older Model Drive Screw Linkage Attaching Screws
SUBFRAME COVER
DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

ATTACHING SCREWS
MARK POSITION OF
TOP SUPPORT BRACKET
3. For newer style supports, remove the J‐bracket as follows:
a) Disconnect the linkage by using a 3/16 in. hex key to remove the 2 screws attaching the drive
linkage to the
J-bracket as shown in Figure 45-16.
Figure 45-16: Newer Model Drive Linkage to J‐Bracket Attaching Screws
REMOVE 2 SHCS
• Using a 5/32 in. hex key remove the 4 screws attaching the J-bracket to the top as shown in
Figure 45-17.
• Using a 4 mm hex key remove the 4 screws attaching the J-bracket to the bearing block as shown in
Figure 45-17.
Figure 45-17: J‐Bracket Attaching Screws

REMOVE 4 TOP SHCS
REMOVE 4 BEARING
BLOCK SHCS
J-BRACKET
as shown in Figure 45‐18. Remove the remaining linkage to nut attaching screw (5/32” hex key).
REMOVE REMAINING
SCREW
6. Remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws (3/16” hex key) from under the
inside of the top subframe as shown in Figure 45‐19.

(viewed from under the table)
7. While supporting the screw, remove the foot‐end drive screw bearing block attaching screws from
under the inside of the top subframe as shown in Figure 45‐19.
Figure 45-20: Head‐End Drive Screw Bearing Block Attaching Screws

(viewed from under the table)
!
CAUTION: Make sure not to remove the drive nut from the drive screw. The drive screw is shipped with
the drive nut assembly installed. If removed, special reassembly procedures are required
a new drive screw nut assembly that is pre-set. Refer to the section “Extended Support
Horizontal Drive Nut Replacement Procedure” on page 529.
Note: Make sure not to apply grease to the drive screw. Grease will cause the horizontal drive to malfunction.
1. Assemble the foot‐end bearing block to the drive screw as follows:
a) Install a sleeve (see Figure 45-21).
• Install the bearing block assembly (see Figure 45-21).
• Install a sleeve (see Figure 45-21).
• Install a locking ring (see Figure 45-21).
• Install the spanner nut (see Figure 45-21).
Figure 45-21: Assembling Foot‐End Bearing Block onto Drive Screw
SLEEVE BEARING ASSY SLEEVE LOCK SPANNER

RING NUT
• Tighten each spanner nut finger tight so that no horizontal movement of the bearing is possible.
• Tighten each spanner nut just enough more so that one of the locking ring tabs can be bent into one
of the notches of the spanner nut (do not loosen the spanner nut to obtain alignment of a locking ring
tab to a spanner nut notch) (see Figure 45-22 on page 581).
Figure 45-22: Locking Ring Tab Engaged to Spanner Nut Notch

(foot end bearing block shown ‐ head end block is similar)
BEND LOCK RING TAB
INTO SPANNER NUT NOTCH
2. Assemble the head‐end bearing block to the drive screw as follows:
a) Install a sleeve (see Figure 45-21).
• Install the bearing block assembly (see Figure 45-21).
• Install a sleeve (see Figure 45-21).
• Install a locking ring (see Figure 45-21).
• Install the spanner nut (see Figure 45-21).
• Tighten each spanner nut finger tight so that no horizontal movement of the bearing is possible.
• Tighten each spanner nut just enough more so that one of the locking ring tabs can be bent into one
of the notches of the spanner nut (do not loosen the spanner nut to obtain alignment of a locking ring
tab to a spanner nut notch) (see Figure 45-22 on page 581).
Figure 45-23: Assembling Head‐End Bearing Block onto Drive Screw

SLEEVE BEARING ASSY SLEEVE LOCK SPANNER
RING NUT
3. Apply Loctite #222 to the 3 ‐ #10‐32X.625 SHCS and attach the drive nut to the linkage assembly to the
nut as shown in Figure 45‐24.
4. Make sure the drive nut flange is centered to the linkage flange and tighten the screw to 10 in‐lb (1.1
N‐m).
Figure 45-24: Installing Linkage to Drive Screw Nut Attaching Screw

INSTALL 3 SCREWS
TORQUE TO 10 in-lb (1.1 N-m)
6. Loosely install the drive screw bearing block attaching screws (1/4‐20X3/4” with flatwashers) enough
to hold the drive screw in place. Leave the screws loose enough to allow the bearing block to move up
and down for alignment.
7. For supports with older style linkage like that shown in Figure 45‐25 perform the following:
a) Swivel the linkage up into position and move it behind the J-bracket as shown in Figure 45-25.
Note: Make sure that the Linkage sets flush against the face of the J‐Block, inside the machined groove, and the Limit
Switch Activation Plate (horizontal plate attached to yolk) is kept level.
• Apply Loctite #242 to the 2 linkage screws and loosely attach the linkage to the top support bracket.
• Position the linkage so that the mark on the linkage made during disassembly aligns with the top
support bracket (see Figure 45-15).
SUBFRAME COVER
DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

ATTACHING SCREWS
SWITCH ACTIVATION
PLATE LEVEL
ALIGN MARK MADE ON

DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE
TO TOP SUPPORT BRACKET
8. For newer style supports, install the J‐bracket as follows:
a) Position the drive nut linkage near the top bearing block as shown in Figure 45-26.
Figure 45-26: Drive Linkage Positioning for J‐Bracket Installation
• Place lockwashers on the 4 screws (1/4-20X1.25 SHCS) and apply Loctite #242 to them. Using a 3/
16 in. hex key attach the J-bracket to the top as shown in Figure 45-27. Torque the screws to 11 ft-
lbs (14.9 N-m) (3/16” hex key).
• Apply Loctite #242 to the 4 screws and using a 4 mm hex key attach the J-bracket to the top bearing
block as shown in Figure 45-27. Torque the screws to 4 N-m (35 in-lbs).
Figure 45-27: J‐Bracket Attaching Screws

INSTALL 4 TOP SHCS
INSTALL 4 BEARING
BLOCK SHCS
J-BRACKET
• Install flatwashers on the 2 linkage SHCS, apply Loctite #242, and using a 3/16 in. hex key attach
the drive linkage to the J-bracket as shown in Figure 45-28.
Figure 45-28: Newer Model Drive Linkage to J‐Bracket Attaching Screws
INSTALL 2 SHCS
bearing block.
10. Counting from the foot end, remove the 13th and 26th rail screws (M5 hex key) (see Figure 45‐29).
11. Install the two aligning brackets as shown in Figure 45‐29.
Figure 45-29: Installing Drive Screw Aligning Brackets
ATTACH BRACKET TO 26TH ATTACH BRACKET TO 13TH

RAIL HOLE FROM FOOT END RAIL HOLE FROM FOOT END
block), tighten the foot‐end bearing block screws.
Figure 45-30: Top Positioned with Drive Nut Next to Foot‐End Bearing Block
13. Remove the 2 alignment brackets.
14. Move the couch top all the way to the head end so the drive screw drive nut is next to the head‐end
drive screw bearing block (see Figure 45‐31). The top should move freely to this position.
If the top becomes more difficult to move as it approaches the head end, the height of the drive screw
linkage and the height of the foot‐end drive screw bearing block must be readjusted. Make several
iterations of this adjustment until the couch top can go from end to end without binding.
15. Reinstall the two aligning brackets as shown in Figure 45‐29 on page 589.
16. With the couch top all the way to the head end so the drive screw drive nut is next to the head‐end
drive screw bearing block as shown in Figure 45‐31) tighten the 2 drive screw head‐end bearing block
attaching SHCS (3/16” hex key).
Figure 45-31: Top Positioned with Drive Nut Next to Head‐End Bearing Block
17. Remove the alignment brackets.
18. Move the support top all the way to the foot end so that the drive screw nut is next to the foot‐end
bearing block (see Figure 45‐30).
The top should move freely. If it begins to bind as the nut approaches the foot‐end, loosen the linkage
screws slightly, move the top all the way to the foot end and retighten the linkage screws. Check that
the top now moves without binding. It should take less than 12 lb. force to move the top.
19. Once the top moves from end to end with less than 12 lb. of force, remove the bearing block screws
one at a time, apply Loctite #242, reinstall them and torque them to 11 ft‐lbs (14.9 N‐m) (3/16” hex
key).
20. On older model supports with linkage shown in Figure 45‐32 perform the following:
a) Torque the drive nut linkage screws to 10 in-lb (1.1 N-m).
• Apply Loctite #222 to the 2 linkage screw locking setscrews, install, and tighten them using a 5/64”
hex key (see Figure 45-32).
Figure 45-32: Older Model Drive Screw Linkage Attachment Screw Locking Setscrew
5/64” HEX KEY TO TIGHTEN

LOCKING SETSCREW
DRIVE SCREW LINKAGE

TORQUE TO 10 in-lb (1.1 N-m)
45.3 Installing the Encoders

1. Thread the encoder cable through the subframe opening and slide the position encoder and mounting
bracket assembly onto the front end of the horizontal drive screw as shown in Figure 45‐33.
2. Apply Loctite #222 to the encoder mounting bracket screws and loosely install them as shown in
Figure 45‐33.
3. Position the mounting bracket so that the top of the bracket is even with the top of the bearing block
and tighten the bracket mounting screws.
4. Tighten the 2 encoder mounting screws shown in Figure 45‐33 (the inside SHCS will require a short‐
head 3/32” hex key).
5. Tighten the setscrews in the relative position encoder drive collar shown in Figure 45‐33 (1/16” hex
TIGHTEN 2 SETSCREWS TIGHTEN 2 SHCS BRACKET EVEN WITH

TOP OF BEARING BLOCK
INSTALL 2 SCREWS
45.3.1 Installing the Absolute Position Encoder

1. Check that the splits in the 2 shaft bushings are halfway between the setscrew holes as shown in
Figure 45‐34.

SPLIT IN BUSHING
SETSCREW
HOLES
2. Thread the absolute encoder connector and cable through the opening in the subframe and slide the
3. Install and tighten the 2 absolute encoder mounting screws with lockwashers and flatwashers (see
Figure 45‐35).
4. Tighten the setscrews in the absolute position encoder drive collar (see Figure 45‐9 on page 567).
5. Connect the encoders (see Figure 45‐6 on page 564).
6. Tie the encoder connectors up under the table (see Figure 45‐6 on page 564).
7. Move the subframe cover back into position and install all of the attaching screws (see Figure on
page 569).
INSTALL 2 ENCODER
MOUNTING SHCS

2. Apply Loctite #222 to the setscrews and install them into the clutch collar as shown in Figure 45‐36
and tighten them snugly.
INSTALL SETSCREWS
4. Install the brake and mounting plate assembly onto the drive shaft (see Figure 45‐37).
5. Connect the MOV and leads to the clutch as shown in Figure 45‐37.

BRAKE MOUNTING PLATE CONNECT MOV &
CLUTCH LEADS
6. Apply Loctite #242 to the 5, 1/4‐20X1” SHCS and attach the rear brace as shown in Figure 45‐38 (3/16”
key). Torque all 5 screws to 11 ft‐lbs (14.9 N‐m).

INSTALL 3 SHCS DISCONNECT INSTALL 2 SHCS
BRAKE
8. Adjust the belt tensioning screw to obtain the correct tension according to a Sonic Tension Meter (see
(see ‘Checking Horizontal Drive Belt Tension on page 707)).
9. Using a 3/16” hex key, torque the 4 motor mounting plate attaching screws to 11 ft‐lbs (14.9 N‐m) (see
Figure 45‐39).

12. Place a 0.015” feeler gage between the brake and the brake plate (see Figure 45‐40). Slide the plate up
against the feeler gage so there is a 0.015” gap between the plate and the brake all the way around.
While holding the feeler gage tightly sandwiched between the brake plate and the brake, tighten the
setscrews in the brake plate hub.
Note: To make sure that the brake plate is uniformly spaced from the brake around it’s circumference it would be good to
used 2 feeler gages and place one on each side of the shaft while holding the brake plate against then and tightening
the setscrews.
Figure 45-40: Setting the Brake Plate Air Gap
0.015” FEELER GAGE
13. Connect the brake wires (see Figure 45‐1 on page 559).

14. Tie the clutch and brake leads to the rear brace with cable ties.
page 83.
a) Move the table top as far toward the head-end as it will go (against the stops).

THIS HOLE
Section 46
Section 46 Horizontal Bearing Removal / Replacement Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal bearings that are mounted in bearing blocks on
each end of the patient support horizontal drive screw assembly. The horizontal drive screw is mounted
along the left side of the patient support upper frame.
!
CAUTION: The drive screw is shipped with the drive nut assembly installed. Do not remove the drive
nut from the drive screw. If the drive nut is removed, special re-assembly procedures are
required and assembly instructions are not provided. If the drive nut does come off the
drive screw, order a new drive screw nut assembly that is pre-set.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• Grease, AFB‐LF 4535 674 47611 (70g cartridge)
• Grease gun (make sure grease gun is clean)
46.0.1 Removal
1. Remove the patient support lower LH, RH, and rear sub frame covers according to the procedure
Subframe Covers Removal and Replacement on page 93.
2. Place the patient support covers into service position according to the procedure Placing the
Brilliance 6‐64 and Big Bore Patient Support into the Service Mode on page 45.
3. Install the vertical safety support according to the procedure Installing the Vertical Safety Support on
page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 46 Horizontal Bearing
WARNING: THE VERTICAL SAFETY SUPPORT BRACE MUST BE INSTALLED WHENEVER PERSONNEL ARE
WORKING UNDER THE TABLE. FAILURE TO DO SO MY RESULT IN PERSONNEL INJURY OR
DEATH.
4. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to System Shutdown and Power Down on page 36.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE INSIDE. TURN OFF POWER SUPPLIES BEFORE SERVICING.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
5. Remove the clutch according to the procedure Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement
Procedure on page 382
6. Remove the horizontal absolute encoder and the horizontal brake according to the section Standard
Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder & Coupling Replacement on page 395 and Standard
Horizontal Brake Replacement Procedure on page 367.
7. Remove the horizontal relative position encoder according to the section Std Horizontal Relative
Position Encoder Replacement on page 415.
Note: During removal, keep track of the shim location and quantity used, to simplify replacement at the same location
during installation.
8. Remove the attaching screws from head end drive screw bearing block shown in Figure 46‐1.
Figure 46-1: Removing bearing block attaching screws
9. Remove the drive screw and bearing block assemblies. Refer to the (see ‘Standard Horizontal Drive
Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 465).
Note: The spacer ring is available from the drive screw assembly. There should be more than one spacer ring near the
bearing block.
11. Remove the horizontal bearings from the bearing block assemblies (Figure 46‐2). If the bearings do
not slip out easily and remain in the bearing block, use the spacer ring from the drive screw
(Figure 40‐9 on page 459) to push out the failed bearings from the block. If the bearings are jammed
into the block, you may need to use a rubber mallet to remove the failed bearings.
Note: If the spacer ring should become cracked or otherwise deformed when using it to push out the failed bearings, order a
new spacer ring (p/n 4535 664 94731).
Figure 46-2: Horizontal Bearing Block Disassembled
Use spacer ring to push out
failed bearings if required Horizontal Bearing Block Disassembled
46.0.2 Installation
Note: Wearing gloves is recommended when packing bearings with grease.
1. Using grease gun, pack the inside of the bearings with AFB‐LF grease. You may inject the grease on
the bearing surface and push the grease into the bearing, or place a small quantity of grease in the
palm of your hand and then push the grease in.
2. Wipe off the excess grease from the outside of the bearings (Figure 46‐3).
Figure 46-3: Packing Bearings with Grease
Packing inside of bearings with grease Packing completed
3. Install one of the bearings by hand into the bearing block with the small, inner race wall towards the
center of the block (see Figure 46‐4). Install the shim into the block on top of the bearing. Then install
the second bearing into the block with the small, inner race wall toward the first bearing (see
Figure 46‐5).
Figure 46-4: Bearings ready for Installation into Bearing Blocks
Small, inner race
Figure 46-5: Bearings shown installed into Bearing Block
4. Install the cover of the bearing block assembly with the inner recess facing into the block (see
Figure 46‐6). Secure cover with four #10‐32 screws. Torque the screws to 15 in‐lb (1.7 N‐m). Repeat
Step 1 through Step 4 for both bearing block assemblies.
Figure 46-6: Installing the Bearing Block Assembly Cover
Note: Make sure not to apply any type of lubricant to the drive screw. Lubricants will cause the horizontal drive to
malfunction.
5. Slide a bearing block assembly onto each end of the drive screw (see Figure 46‐7).
Figure 46-7: Identifying Bearing Block Assemblies
Head End Bearing Block Foot End Bearing Block
7. Install the drive screw and bearing block assemblies onto the patient support. Refer to the Standard
Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 465.
8. Install the horizontal relative position encoder according to the section Std Horizontal Relative
Position Encoder Replacement on page 415.
9. Install the horizontal absolute encoder and the horizontal brake according to the section Standard
Horizontal Absolute Position Encoder & Coupling Replacement on page 395 and Standard
Horizontal Brake Replacement Procedure on page 367.
10. Install the clutch according to the procedure Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement
Procedure on page 382.
11. Turn ON power to the patient support. Refer to the Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
12. Remove the vertical safety support according to the procedure Removing the Vertical Safety Support
on page 83.
13. Take the patient support covers out of the service position according to the procedure Placing the
Brilliance 6‐64 and Big Bore Patient Support into the Service Mode on page 45.
Subframe Covers Removal and Replacement on page 93.
Section 47
Section 47 Top Horizontal Force Adjustment Procedure
This procedure is to adjust the patient support top to obtain the minimum required force required for
free‐floating travel.
There are two areas of adjustment, adjusting the horizontal drive screw and adjusting the top J‐brackets.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• Spring pull scale to measure up to 25 pounds pull.
Material Required:
• Loctite #222
47.1 Drive Screw Adjustment

on page 80.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 47 Top Horizontal Force

TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH OF PERSONNEL.
page 36 or “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on page 36.
In order to get access to one of the drive screw linkage screws and the J‐bracket screws the upper
subframe cover will need to be detached and moved to the head end.
5. To move the upper subframe cover out of the way, remove 5 screws along each side of the underside
of the subframe that attach the subframe top cover. The 2 screws under the head end are shown in
Figure 47‐2 on page 616 as an example. The other 8 screws are in similar locations along each side.
The top can be moved as needed to gain access to the screws. If there is enough space at the head end
of the scanner room the cover can be removed.


ATTACHING SCREWS
6. Loosen the horizontal drive belt. For standard supports refer to the section (see ‘Standard Horizontal
Drive Belt Removal / Replacement Procedure on page 356). For bariatric supports refer to the section
(see ‘Bariatric & Extended Horizontal Drive Belt Replacement Procedure on page 361).
7. Loosen the 3 bolts holding the bearing block at the foot end of the drive shaft at the clutch. See
Figure 47‐3 on page 617 for standard supports or Figure 47‐4 on page 617 for bariatric supports.
8. Move the support top to fully out position.
9. Loosen the rear (clutch end) drive screw bearing block screws and move the support top back and
forth while supporting the bearing block to find the lowest force position.
Figure 47-3: Standard Rear Drive Screw Support Figure 47-4: Bariatric Rear Drive Screw Support

Bearing Mount Bearing Mount
REMOVE 3 SCREWS REMOVE 3 SCREWS
10. Tighten down the block and check the force required to move the top. Repeat the adjustment if
necessary. Try to achieve less than 18 pounds to move top (this applies for all positions).
11. Move the support top to the fully in position.
12. Loosen the front drive screw bearing block screws and move the support top back and forth while
supporting the bearing block to find the lowest force position.
13. Tighten down the bearing block and check the force required to move the top. Repeat the adjustment
if necessary.
14. Move the support top to the middle and check if force is still low. If it is not, perform the following J‐
bracket adjustment procedure. If the force for moving the top is within specification, return the
system to operation according to the procedure (see ‘Returning the System to Operation on page
621).
47.2 J-Bracket Adjustment

This procedure is intended to follow the preceding procedure (see ‘Drive Screw Adjustment on page
613). To perform this procedure the patient support must be prepared as indicated in that procedure.
1. Move the support top to the middle of itʹs travel.
2. Load 100 ‐ 150 pounds on the support top over the 4 J‐brackets.
3. In each of the 4 J‐brackets, loosen the 4 screws holding the J‐bracket to the linear bearing block (see
Figure 47‐5).
Figure 47-5: J‐Bracket Screws
LOOSEN 4 J-BRACKET SCREWS
4. Move the top all the way in and all the way out 2 times to settle the load and align the J‐blocks.
5. Tighten down the opposing J‐blocks in the following sequence:
• Tighten the left front J-block screws.
• Tighten the right rear J-block screws
• Tighten the left rear J-block screws.
• Tighten the right front J-block screws.
6. Check that the force required to move the top at its fully‐in position is still low.
7. Check that the force required to move the top at its fully‐out position is still low.
8. Readjust the appropriate bearing block if necessary.
9. Check that the force required to move the top at its middle position is still low.
10. Readjust the J‐Blocks if necessary.
11. Tighten the 3 bolts holding the bearing block at the foot end of the drive shaft at the clutch. See
(Figure 47‐3 on page 617) for standard supports or Figure 47‐4 on page 617 for bariatric supports.
12. Verify that the force to move the top is still low at the fully in, middle, and fully out positions.
13. Tighten the drive belt to 40‐80 pounds using the sonic tension meter.
14. Verify that the force to move the top is still low at the fully in, middle, and fully out positions.
15. Reinstall the upper subframe cover.
16. Check that there is clearance between the subframe cover and the carbon top.
17. Check the support top motion at the fully in, middle, and fully out positions.
18. Return the system to operation according to the following procedure.
47.2.1 Returning the System to Operation

page 83.
5. Check the support top motion at the fully in, middle, and fully out positions.
6. For instructions to release, engage and test the patient support
7. latch, see Releasing the Patient Support Subframe Quick Release on page 714, Engaging the Patient
Support Subframe Quick Release on page 715, and Testing Patient Support Subframe Quick Release
on page 717.
Section 48
Section 48 Top Bearing Block Removal / Replacement Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the top bearing block assemblies.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
• Torque wrench to tighten bearing block screws requiring a 4 mm hex key to 10 ft‐lbs (13.5 N‐m).
Material Required:
• Loctite #222 & 242
• Lint‐free shop towels for cleaning bearing rails
• Isopropyl alcohol for cleaning bearing rails
Parts Required: One of the following kits:
• Standard Brilliance Patient Support Bearing Block Kit P/N 4535 674 47631
• Bariatric Patient Support Bearing Block Kit P/N 4535 674 47641
• Each kit consists of 4 bearing blocks and mounting hardware.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 48 Top Bearing Block
48.1 Preparation for Bearing Block Replacement

All 4 bearing blocks should be replaced as a set. However, to allow replacement by one person, this
procedure is written for replacing one bearing block at a time.
1. The table upper subframe can be released and moved away from the gantry to give more access room
as follows:
a. If installed, remove the access cover (not shown) in Figure 48‐1 on page 625.
b. To disengage the patient support subframe quick release, see “Releasing the Patient Support
Subframe Quick Release” on page 714.
Figure 48-1: Patient Support Subframe Quick Release
WING NUT RELEASE
PATIENT SUPPORT LATCH, OVERALL
SUBFRAME SUPPORT, THREADED ROD NYLOCK NUT RELEASE

DISENGAGED NUT RELEASE
2. Remove the patient support LH, RH, and rear upper subframe covers according to the procedure
Note: Before removing the subframe upper cover screws, mark the position of at least 2 screws so that the cover can be
reinstalled in the same position. The subframe upper cover (see Figure ) will need to be detached and moved in order
to gain access to the bearing block fasteners.
Figure 48-2: Subframe Upper Cover
SUBFRAME UPPER COVER
3. Detach the subframe upper cover by removing 5 screws along each side of the underside of the
subframe. The 2 screws under the head end are shown in Figure 48‐3 on page 627 for an example. The
other 8 screws are in similar locations along each side. The top can be moved as needed to gain access
to the bearing mounting screws.
4. Slide the cover toward the head end enough to access the bearing block screws.

(Viewed from Underneath

ATTACHING SCREWS
5. Remove the two attaching screws and remove the right top side cover as shown in Figure 48‐4 on
page 628.
Figure 48-4: Top Right Side Cover (left is similar)
OLDER STYLE COVER ATTACHING SCREWS NEWER STYLE COVER ATTACHING SCREWS
(UNDERNEATH) (UNDERNEATH)
6. On older style covers, disconnect the tapeswitch connector (see Figure 48‐5).
7. Remove the two attaching screws and remove the left top side cover (similar to the right shown in
Figure 48‐4 on page 628) and disconnect the tapeswitch, if present (see Figure 48‐5).
Figure 48-5: Older Style Right Top Side Cover (Left is Similar)
TAPESWITCH
CONNECTOR
ROUTE TAPESWITCH
WIRE OVER BRACKET
8. Remove the left and right head‐end stop blocks by removing the 2 attaching screws from each (see
Figure 48‐6).
Figure 48-6: Right Head‐End Horizontal Stop Block (Left is Similar)
HEAD-END STOP BLOCK HEAD-END STOP BLOCK

ATTACHING SCREWS
9. Remove the left and right foot‐end stop blocks by removing the 3 attaching screws from each (see
Figure 48‐7).
Figure 48-7: Right Foot‐End Horizontal Stop Block (Left is Similar)
FOOT-END STOP BLOCK FOOT-END STOP BLOCK

ATTACHING SCREWS
48.2 Bearing Block Removal
Note: Placing a block to hold the table top in position when the bearing block is detached as shown in would make the
installation of the new bearing block easier.
Figure 48-8: Blocking Table Top In Position
!
CAUTION: The bearing attachment hardware is metric. Do not use SAE tools or damage may occur.
10. Remove the 4 screws attaching the right‐rear bearing block to the top support J‐Bracket using a 4 mm
hex key (see Figure 48‐9).
Note: Do not move the tabletop along the linear bearings unless absolutely necessary while a bearing block is removed.
11. Slide the bearing block off the end of the rail.
Figure 48-9: Right Foot‐End Top Support J‐Bracket (Others are Similar)

(USE 4 MM HEX KEY)
BEARING BLOCK
48.3 Bearing Block Replacement

1. Clean as much of the bearing rail as possible with lint‐free shop towels and alcohol. Do not apply any
lubricant to the rail. The replacement bearings are pre‐lubricated with correct amount of lubricant.
2. There are tapped grease‐fitting holes in both ends of the new bearing block. Install the provided
grease fitting in the same end of the new bearing block as it was in the old block and install the
provided plug in the other end.
3. The replacement bearing block comes with a rail segment inserted to hold the ball bearings in place.
Place the end of the rail segment in the bearing block right up against and aligned with the table rail
4. While holding the end of the rail segment in the bearing block up against the end of the table rail,
slide the bearing from the rail segment directly onto the table rail.
5. Position the bearing block so that the screw holes align with the J‐bracket.
Note: Use the new attaching hardware provided in the kit. Discard the old bearings and hardware.
6. Apply Loctite # 222 to the 4 bearing block screws and install them. Torque them to 10 ft‐lbs (13.5 N‐
m).
Figure 48-10: Installing the Bearing Block (head end, RH side shown)
7. Repeat Step 10 on page 633 to Step 6 on page 635 for the left, head‐end bearing block.

8. Repeat Step 10 on page 633 to Step 6 on page 635 for the right, foot‐end bearing block.
Note: The procedure is the same but the left, foot‐end J‐bracket is different in appearance because it connects to the
horizontal drive screw (see Figure 48‐11).
9. Repeat Step 10 on page 633 to Step 6 on page 635 for the left, foot‐end bearing block.
10. Apply Loctite # 242 to the 3 attaching screws for each stop block and install the left and right foot‐end
stop blocks
11. Apply Loctite #242 the 2 attaching screws for each stop block and install the left and right head‐end
stop blocks
12. Check the force required to move the table top horizontally with the brake released and if it seems to
be excessive, perform the (see ‘Top Horizontal Force Adjustment Procedure on page 613).
Figure 48-11: Left Foot‐End Top Support J‐Bracket (with drive screw attachment)
BEARING BLOCK
DRIVE SCREW
LINKAGE SCREWS
DRIVE SCREW
LINKAGE
13. The replacement bearings are pre‐lubricated with correct amount of lubricant and should not require
lubrication at installation. These bearing blocks must only be lubricated at the interval specified in the
Planned Maintenance manual with AFB‐LF grease P/N 4535 674 47611 which is included in lubricant
kit P/N 4535 670 23141 along with a grease gun.
!
CAUTION: After the interval specified in the applicable Brilliance Planned Maintenance Manual these
bearing blocks must only be lubricated with AFB-LF grease P/N 4535 674 47611 which is
included in lubricant kit P/N 4535 670 23141 along with a grease gun.
Lubricating the bearing blocks with any other type of grease may cause improper table
operation and damage the bearings. See the applicable Brilliance Planned Maintenance
Manual for the lubrication frequency and procedure.
48.4 Restoring the System to Operation

1. Install the patient support LH, RH, and rear subframe covers according to the procedure “Subframe
RH, LH, and Rear Covers Installation” on page 107.
2. Slide the subframe upper cover (see Figure ) into position and start the 10 attaching screws into their
holes.
3. Position the cover so the screws are aligned with the marks made during disassembly and tighten the
screws.
4. Install the top side covers (see Figure 48‐4). If the table has the old style covers with tapeswitches,
plug in the tapeswitches and route the tapeswitch wire over the bracket as shown in Figure 48‐5 on
page 629.
5. If the subframe quick release was disengaged:
a. For instructions to re‐engage the quick release, see Engaging the Patient Support Subframe Quick
Release on page 715.
b. For instructions to test the quick release after re‐engagement, see Testing Patient Support Subframe
Quick Release on page 717.
Section 49
Section 49 Bariatric Gas Spring Removal / Replacement Procedure
This procedure is for the replacement of the horizontal assist gas springs (P/N 4535 673 90051) on the
Brilliance Bariatric patient support.
The gas springs are mounted underneath the patient support top frame.
Tools Required:
• FE Tool Kit
Material Required:
• Loctite #242
3. The next step is to install the vertical safety support; however, after the safety support is installed,
raise the table height so that the scissors bearing is about 1/8” away from the end of it’s travel as
on page 80.

Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 49 Bariatric Gas Spring
5. Remove the horizontal drive motor according to the procedure “Horizontal Drive Motor Removal”
on page 344.
WARNING: Hazardous voltages ARE inside. TURN OFF POWER supplies before servicing. Failure to do so
Figure 49-1: Gap Between Scissors Bearing and End of Travel
ADJUST TABLE HEIGHT

TO GET 1/8” GAP HERE
!
WARNING: Do not remove a gas spring mounting screw if it is difficult to turn due to spring pressure
against it. If there seems to be pressure against a gas spring mounting screw, raise or lower
couch as required until the mounting screws turn freely. Removing a screw under pressure
may allow a sudden movement of the spring which can cause personnel injury by a thrown
screw or by pinching extremities.
7. Gas springs should be replaced one at a time. Attempt to loosen one attaching screw of one gas
spring. If there seems to be spring pressure against the screw, adjust the table height up or down
slightly until the pressure is removed. See Figure 1‐2 on page 641 and Figure 1‐3 on page 641.
8. Remove the attaching screws for each end of one spring and remove the spring.
Figure 1-2: Front Gas Spring Mounting Screws Figure 1-3: Rear Gas Spring Mounting Screws
9. When the gas spring is free, slide it out through the motor mounting hole in the back of the couch as
10. Lay the old gas spring alongside the new one and compare their lengths. Turn the ends of the new
spring clockwise to shorten the spring or counterclockwise to lengthen it. Both ends are right‐hand
threaded. Both ends should be adjusted approximately the same number of turns.
11. Install the new gas spring in the table. Adjust the spring ends in or out to make the attaching screws
thread in easily. Apply Loctite #242 to the screws and install the attaching screws.
12. Repeat Step 8 on page 641 through Step 11 on page 642 to replace the other two gas springs.
13. Torque all spring mounting screws to 12 lb.‐in [1.4 Nm].
Figure 1-4: Removing a Gas Spring
14. Install the horizontal drive motor according to the procedure “Horizontal Drive Motor Installation”
on page 354.
16. Remove the vertical safety support according to the procedure “Removing the Vertical Safety
Section 50
Section 50 Standard Brilliance Patient Support Carbon Top
Replacement
Tools Required: FE Tool Kit, Loctite #222
Note: New tape switches are required.
50.1 Removal
2. Loosen but do not remove the two screws on the underside of the patient support handle on the left
side of the patient support. Refer to Figure 50‐1 on page 644.
Figure 50-1: Removing Patient Support Handles (Left Side Shown)
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 50 Standard Brilliance
Two Screws Each Side (Left Side Shown)
3. Disconnect the tape switch connector from the patient support handle on the left side of the patient
support.
4. Support the handle from falling and remove two screws completely from the patient support handle
for the left side. Carefully lower and remove the handle.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the patient support handle on the right side of the patient support.
6. Cut ty wraps and disconnect the tape switch cable plug P752 from the tape switch PCB connector
J752. Refer to Figure 50‐2 on page 646. Carefully remove the tape switch cable from the patient
support.
7. Remove one screw and two external tooth washers securing ground cable connection at ground point
PE9. Refer to Figure 50‐2 on page 646.
Figure 50-2: Cable Connections Detail
J-Block
Tape Switch Connection Detail Ground Cable Detail
8. Remove two screws and washers securing the tape switch PCB bracket to the right side extrusion of
the carbon top, and remove the bracket. Be sure to support the carbon top at both sides to avoid
dropping the top or pinching cables.
9. Remove 16 screws and lockwashers securing the carbon top to the j‐blocks, and remove the carbon
top. Refer to Figure 50‐2 on page 646.
50.2 Installation
1. Install new tapeswitches onto the top. See (see ‘Brilliance Horizontal Tape Switches Replacement on
page 674).
2. Move the rear J‐blocks to the end of their travel against the mechanical stops. Move the front J‐blocks
so there is a 12 and 13/16 in. (32.5 cm) gap between the blocks.
3. Place a 7/8 in. (2.2 cm) thickness block on top of the top cover near the front of the unit, and set the
carbon top onto the J‐blocks and secure in place with 16 screws and lockwashers. The front of the
carbon top should be resting on the gauge block. Remove the gauge block after the carbon top is
secured. Refer to Figure 50‐3 on page 648.
Figure 50-3: Carbon Top Installation
!
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING THE TAPE SWITCH PCB BRACKET, ENSURE THAT NO PART OF THE
BRACKET OR TAPE SWITCH PCB COMES IN CONTACT WITH ANY PART OF THE UNIT.
4. Mount the tape switch PCB bracket to the right side extrusion of the carbon top. Loctite #222 with two
screws and washers. The PC board should be oriented into the subframe channel. Push the bracket all
the way up prior to tightening screws. Refer to Figure Figure 50‐4 on page 648.
5. Pull the left hand end of the tape switch cable through the large round hole in the right side extrusion
of the carbon top to the left side of the extrusion. Refer to Figure 50‐4 on page 648.
Figure 50-4: Tape Switch Pcb Bracket Mounting And Cable Routing
Bracket Mounting Detail
Tape Switch Cable Routing Detail
6. Connect tape switch cable plug J752 to P752 on the PC board at the bottom of the bracket. Refer to
7. Place one washer above and below the lug of the ground cable PE9. Secure lug and washers to the
tapped hole in the extrusion of the carbon top next to the bracket with one screw. Refer to Figure 50‐5
on page 650.
8. Remove cable slack and ty wrap with the ground cable to the side of the bracket.
Tape Switch Connection Detail Ground Cable Detail
9. Install left and right handles as follows: Place aligning pin into mating groove at the rear underside of
the couch top. Verify tape switch cable does not obstruct handle interface to carbon top and is not
pinched. Secure handle with Loctite #222 and two 1/4 ‐ 20 x 1/2 socket head cap screws and
lockwashers.
manual.
Section 51
Section 51 Extended Patient Support Carbon Top Replacement
Procedure
Tools and Material Required:
• FE Tool Kit,
• Loctite #222
• Modified hex key
• Gage Block P/N 4598 001 26611 (Figure 51‐6 on page 658)
• New tape switches
51.1 Removal
2. Move the support top to the foot end.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 51 Extended Patient
3. Using a short‐end modified hex‐key remove the two screws attaching the left side J‐bracket cover to
the carbon top assembly (see Figure 51‐1).
Figure 51-1: J‐bracket Cover Attaching Screws

(RH cover shown, LH cover is similar)
REMOVE 2 SCREWS UNDER HANDLE
4. Disconnect the tapeswitch connector (see Figure 51‐2).
Figure 51-2: Tapeswitch Connection On Left Side of SupportI

DISCONNECT TAPESWITCH
CONNECTOR
5. Using a short‐end modified hex‐key remove the two screws attaching the right‐side J‐bracket cover to
the carbon top assembly (see Figure 51‐1).
6. Cut cable ties and disconnect the tape switch plug P752 from the transition board connector J752.
Refer to
Figure 51‐3.
7. Disconnect the ground wire from the table top frame connection at ground point PE9. Refer to
Figure 51‐3.
8. Remove the two transition board mounting bracket screws shown in Figure 51‐3.
9. Pull the tapeswitch cable out of the hole through the support top and retain it for installation in the
new top.
Figure 51-3: Transition Board Mounting Bracket Screws
TRANSITION BOARD DISCONNECT

MOUNTING BRACKET GROUND
SCREWS
TAPE SWITCH
CONNECTOR P752
TRANSITION BOARD
10. Support the carbon top so that it does not fall and remove the 4 mounting screws from each of the 4 J‐
blocks (see Figure 51‐4). Remove the carbon top.
Figure 51-4: Table Top J‐Brackets
REMOVE 4 SCREWS
FROM ALL 4 J-BLOCKS
51.2 Installation
1. Install new tapeswitches onto the new carbon top (see “Brilliance Horizontal Tape Switches
Replacement” on page 674).
2. Move the foot‐end J‐blocks to the end of their travel against the mechanical stops.
3. Move the head‐end J‐blocks so there is a 12 and 13/16 in. (32.5 cm) gap between the blocks.
Figure 51-5: J‐Block Positioning for Top Installation

12-13/16 BETWEEN J-BLOCKS FOOT J-BLOCKS TO
REAR OF TRAVEL
4. Place the gage block (1‐15/16” thick ‐ P/N 4598 001 26611) on the subframe top cover near the front of
the unit as shown in Figure 51‐6.
5. Place lockwashers on the 16 top screws and apply Loctite #242 to them.
6. Position the carbon top between the left and right J‐blocks with the head end of the carbon top resting
on the gauge block and secure it in place with16 screws with lockwashers.
7. Torque the bolts following an X pattern to 11 ft‐lbs (14.9 N‐m).
8. Remove the gage block after the carbon top is secured.
on the gauge block and secure it in place with 16 screws with lockwashers and Loctite #242 applied.
Figure 51-6: Top Spacer Block
GAGE BLOCK
!
CAUTION: When installing the transition board bracket, make sure that no part of the bracket or
transition board comes in contact with the subframe covers over the entire travel. Failure to
comply may cause equipment damage.
11. Put flatwashers on the2 (10‐32X1/2 SHCS) transition board bracket screws and apply Loctite #222.
12. Mount the transition board bracket to the right side of the carbon top. Position the bracket so that the
board is level and so that it clears the subframe side cover and top cover over the entire top travel.
Refer to Figure Figure 51‐7.
13. Thread the tape switch cable through the hole in the carbon top so that the LH tapeswitch connector is
on the left, and plug P752 to the transition board is on the right as shown in Figure 51‐7.
Figure 51-7: Tape Switch PCB Bracket Mounting And Cable Routing
TRANSITION BOARD THREAD TAPESWITCH CABLE CONNECTOR P752

BRACKET SCREWS THROUGH HOLE TO TRANSITION BOARD
14. Connect tape switch cable plug J752 to P752 on the transition board. Refer to Figure 51‐8.

15. Place one washer above and below the lug of the ground cable to PE9. Secure lug and washers to the
tapped hole in the extrusion of the carbon top next to the bracket with one screw. Refer to Figure 51‐8.
16. Tie the cables in place as shown inFigure 51‐8.
17. Place lockwashers on the 4, 1/4 x 1/2” SHCS J‐bracket cover screws, apply Loctite #222 and install both
J‐bracket covers (see Figure 51‐1).
manual.
TRANSITION BOARD CONNECT

MOUNTING BRACKET GROUND (PE9)
SCREWS
TAPE SWITCH
CONNECTOR P752
TRANSITION BOARD
Section 52
Section 52 Dual-v.EXP Carbon Top Replacement
Tools & Material Required: FE Tool Kit,
• Loctite #222, Loctite #242
• Gage block 7/8‐in. thick about 4 in. wide and about 6 in. long to position the top during installation
(see Figure 52‐6 on page 668)
52.1 Removal
1. Turn OFF power to the patient support. Refer to the “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System
2. Remove the subframe side covers (see Removing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers on page 8‐
120).
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 52 Dual‐v.EXP Carbon
3. Remove the hole cover plugs and use a deep 7/16‐in. socket to remove the nut located in each handle
that attaches the rear bumper (see Figure 52‐1).
Figure 52-1: Removing Dual v.EXP Patient Support Rear Bumper
REAR BUMPER
REMOVE HOLE COVER

REMOVE 7/16-IN. NUT
Note: Be sure to support the handle while removing the screws. It will drop as soon as the screws release.
4. Support the left handle from falling and using a 1/4‐in. hex key remove the 2 handle mounting screws
(see Figure 52‐2). Carefully remove the handle.
Figure 52-2: Removing Dual v.EXP Patient Support Top Handle
HANDLE SCREWS (VIEWED FROM THE BOTTOM)
5. Disconnect the tape switch connector.
6. Repeat Step 4 on page 663 through Step 5 on page 664 for the patient support handle on the right side
of the patient support.
7. Cut cable ties and disconnect the tape switch plug P752 from the transition board connector J752.
Refer to
Figure 52‐3.
8. Disconnect the ground wire from the carbon top frame connection at ground point PE9. Refer to
Figure 52‐3.
9. Remove the two transition board mounting bracket screws shown in Figure 52‐3.
10. Pull the tapeswitch cable out of the hole through the support top and retain it for installation in the
new top.
TRANSITION BOARD DISCONNECT

MOUNTING BRACKET GROUND PE9
SCREWS
TAPE SWITCH
CONNECTOR P752
TRANSITION BOARD
11. Be sure to support the carbon top at both sides to avoid dropping the top or pinching cables.
12. Support the carbon top so that it does not fall and remove the 4 mounting screws from each of the 4 J‐
blocks (see Figure 52‐4).
13. Carefully remove the carbon top.
Figure 52-4: Table Top J‐Brackets
REMOVE 4 SCREWS
FROM ALL 4 J-BLOCKS
52.2 Installation
1. Move the foot‐end J‐blocks to the end of their travel against the mechanical stops.
2. Move the head‐end J‐blocks so there is a 12 and 13/16 in. (32.5 cm) gap between the blocks (see
Figure 52‐5).
Figure 52-5: J‐Block Positioning for Top Installation

12-13/16 BETWEEN J-BLOCKS FOOT J-BLOCKS TO
REAR OF TRAVEL
3. Place a 7/8 in. (2.2 cm) thickness block on top of the top cover near the front of the unit (see Figure 52‐
6).
4. Apply Loctite #242 to the 16 J‐block screws.
on the gauge block and secure the top to the J‐blocks 16 screws with lockwashers.
Figure 52-6: Top Spacer Block
7/8 IN. GAGE BLOCK

(PLACE ON TOP OF
SUBFAME TOP COVER -
NOT SHOWN)
!
CAUTION: WHEN INSTALLING THE TAPE SWITCH PCB BRACKET, MAKE SURE THAT NO PART OF THE
BRACKET OR TAPE SWITCH PCB COMES IN CONTACT WITH ANY PART OF THE UNIT.
7. Place washers on the 2 tape switch PCB bracket screws and apply Loctite #222.
8. Orient the tape switch PCB bracket on the right side of the support as shown in Figure 52‐7 on
page 669 and attach it with the 2 screws. Push the bracket all the way up and tighten the screws.
9. Pull the end of the tape switch cable through the hole in the right side of the carbon top frame and out
the left side. Refer to Figure 52‐7 on page 669.
Figure 52-7: Tape Switch PCB Bracket Mounting And Cable Routing

MOUNT BRACKET PULL THE TAPESWITCH CABLE
WITH 2 SCREWS THROUGH FROM THE OTHER SIDE
10. Connect tape switch cable plug J752 to P752 on the PC board at the bottom of the bracket. Refer to
11. Place one washer on the ground screw, insert it through the ground wire lug, and install the other star
washer on the screw. Secure the ground lug to the hole in the carbon top next to PE9 ground label.
12. Remove cable slack and ty wrap with the ground cable to the side of the bracket.

TAPE SWITCH CONNECTOR P/J752 CONNECT GROUND WIRE TO PE9
13. Apply Loctite #242 to the 4 handle screws, connect the tapeswitches, and install both handles (see
14. Install the rear bumper (see Figure 52‐1 on page 662).
15. Install the subframe side covers (see Installing MX8000 Dual v.EXP Subframe Covers on page 8‐125).
16. Turn ON power to the patient support (see System Power Up on page 2‐41).

manual.
Section 53
Section 53 Horizontal In/Out Limit Switches Removal /
The horizontal in/out limit switches are mounted to the left, inside channel of the patient support outer
subframe. The IN limit switch is closest to the gantry, and the OUT limit switch is furthest from the gantry.
Removal / replacement is similar for either switch.
53.1 Removal
1. Remove patient support LH lower subframe cover to access limit switches. Refer to “Brilliance
Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers Removal” on page 93.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 53 Horizontal In/Out
3. Tag and disconnect wiring leads from switch to be removed. Refer to Figure 53‐1 on page 673.

4. Remove two screws securing switch to frame, and remove switch.
Figure 53-1: Horizontal In/out Limit Switches Locations
Horizontal In Limit Switch Horizontal Out Limit Switch
53.2 Installation
1. Install switch to frame with two screws. For the IN limit switch, ensure the plunger arm clears the
switch housing when the top is moved all the way in. For the OUT limit switch, ensure the plunger
arm clears the switch housing when the top is moved all the way out.
2. Connect wiring leads to switch.
3. Install patient support LH lower subframe cover. Refer to “Subframe RH, LH, and Rear Covers
Installation” on page 107.
page 36 or “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power Up” on page 36.
5. Perform patient support horizontal calibration. Refer to the applicable Brilliance CT Calibration
manual.
Section 54
Section 54 Brilliance Horizontal Tape Switches Replacement
The procedure is similar for either the RH or LH horizontal tape switch.
Tools Required: FE Tool Kit, Loctite #222
54.1 Removal
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 54 Brilliance Horizontal
2. Loosen but do not remove the two screws on the underside of the patient support handle on the side
of the patient support. Refer to Figure 54‐1 on page 675.
Figure 54-1: Removing Patient Support Handles
TWO SCREWS EACH SIDE (LEFT SIDE SHOWN)
3. Disconnect the tape switch connector from the patient support handle.
4. Support the handle from falling and remove two screws and lockwashers completely from the patient
support handle. Carefully lower and remove the handle.
5. Feed the tape switch handle cable L22501 connector through the access hole on the patient support
handle and carefully peel the cable and double sided tape backing from the handle. Refer to Figure
on page 676.
Figure 54-2: Tapeswitch Handle Cable L22501 (Left side shown)
54.2 Installation
1. Clean inside of the side patient support handle where tape switch is to be placed with alcohol.
2. Adhere a strip of double sided tape to the bottom of the tape switch, peel the backing from the tape,
and secure the tape switch handle cable L22501 to the inside of the patient support handle.
3. Feed the tape switch handle cable connector through the access hole in the patient support handle.
4. Position the patient support handle next to the patient support. Connect the tape switch handle cable
connector to the tape switch cable.
5. Place aligning pin into mating groove at the rear underside of the couch top. Verify tape switch cable
does not obstruct handle interface to carbon top and is not pinched. Secure handle with Loctite #222
and two 1/4 ‐ 20 x 1/2 socket head cap screws and lockwashers.
7. Check the tapeswitches for proper operation.
Section 55
Section 55 Multi-Function Footswitch & Parts Replacement
This procedure is for replacing the entire multi‐function footswitch P/N 4535 674 23491 shown in
Figure 55‐1 on page 679 or its replaceable parts listed in Table 55‐1 on page 679. The replacement
procedures for the footswitch and all the parts are all in one procedure. For any replaceable part, begin at
the start of the procedure and complete the steps to reach the part to be replaced.
Tools Required:
FE Tool Kit (must include a 2.5 mm hex key)
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 55 Multi‐Function
Figure 55-1: Footswitch P/N 4535 674 23491

UNLOAD FOOTPEDAL LOAD FOOTPEDAL FLOAT FOOTPEDAL
P/N 4535 674 49421 P/N 4535 674 49431 P/N 4535 674 49411
Table 55-1:
Part Number Part Name Time Required See Figure
4535 674 49411 Footpedal, Float Position Figure 55-3 on page 682
4535 674 49421 Footpedal, Unload Position Figure 55-3 on page 682
Part Number Part Name Time Required See Figure
4535 674 49431 Footpedal, Load Position Figure 55-3 on page 682
4535 674 50781 Spring Figure 55-4 on page 683
4535 674 50801 Diaphragm, Splash Protection Figure 55-5 on page 684
4535 674 34711 Round Footpedal Switch Figure 55-6 on page 685
55.1 Removing the Footswitch

55.1.1 Removing the Footpedals
1. Turn OFF power to the gantry and to the patient support. Refer to the applicable System Power Up/
Power Down Procedure, either “Brilliance 6‐64, Big Bore and Dual v.EXP System Power Down/Power
Up” on page 36 or “Brilliance iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up” on page 48.
2. Remove the 4 footswitch cover screws (see Figure 55‐2) and remove the footswitch cover.
Figure 55-2: Footswitch Cover Screws
FOOTSWITCH COVER SCREWS

(2 ON OTHER SIDE ALSO)
3. Using a 2.5 mm hex key, remove the attaching screw(s) (see Figure 55‐3) for the footpedal(s) to be
replaced or all 3 screws if other parts are to be replaced.
If only footpedals are being replaced, once the footpedal(s) to be replaced are removed, skip to the
reassembly procedure Step 11 on page 55‐693.
Figure 55-3: Footswitch Pedals

FOOTPEDAL SCREWS
(2.5 mm HEX KEY)
UNLOAD LOAD FLOAT

PEDAL PEDAL PEDAL
4. Remove the three actuator disks from the switches as shown in Figure 55‐13 on page 692.

5. If the springs on the splash cover are to be replaced, replace them and then skip to the Step 10 on page
55‐692. To replace a spring, twist it to “unscrew” it from the retainer and twist the new one on.
6. Remove the two screws and remove the filler cover as shown in Figure 55‐13 on page 692.
Figure 55-4: Footswitch Actuator Disks
REMOVE 2 SCREWS AND REMOVE 3 ACTUATOR DISKS

FILLER COVER
SPRINGS (12)
P/N 4535 674 50781
7. The splash protection diaphragms are on top of the splash cover as shown in Figure 55‐5 on page 684.

If these diaphragms are to be replaced, replace them and then skip to Step 10 on page 55‐692 to begin
the reassembly.
8. If one or more of the switches are to be replaced, continue with the procedure.
9. Remove the splash cover (diverter) on the footswitch as shown in Figure 55‐5 on page 684.
Figure 55-5: Splash Protection Diaphragms on Splash Cover (Diverter)
SPLASH PROTECTION DIAPHRAMS SPLASH COVER

P/N 4535 674 50801 (DIVERTER)
10. Refer to Figure 55‐6 on page 685. Disconnect the cable coming from the control board, two cables

coming from the couch, and 2 ground wires as indicated.
11. Disconnect the cable for the switch(es) to be replaced.
Figure 55-6: Disconnecting Multi‐Function Footswitch Cables for Removal
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT
GROUND WIRES 2 CABLES TO COUCH
ROUND FOOTSWITCHES (3) DISCONNECT CABLE TO

P/N 4535 674 34711 CONTROL BOARD
12. Using a knife, cut through the double‐sided tape holding the footswitch to the floor along each side of
the footswitch to free it from the floor.
13. Remove the footswitch from under the cables as shown in Figure 55‐7 on page 686.
Figure 55-7: Removing the Multi‐Function Footswitch
14. To replace one or more of the individual switches, turn the footswitch over, remove the three screws
attaching each switch to be replaced (see Figure 55‐8) and remove the switch(es).
15. Note the position of the standoffs on the switch to be replaced, remove them and install them in the
same positions on the new switch.
Figure 55-8: Switch Attaching Screws on Bottom of Footswitch
UNLOAD SWITCH SCREWS LOAD SWITCH SCREWS FLOAT SWITCH SCREWS
COUCH GANTRY
55.2 Footswitch Assembly and Installation

1. Note the position of the standoffs on the switch to be replaced, remove them and install them in the
same positions on the new switch.
2. Attach the new footswitch(es) with three screws (see Figure 55‐9).
3. Apply two new strips of double‐sided tape to the back of the footswitch as shown in Figure 55‐9 on
page 688. Leave the protective covering on the exposed side of the tape until the footswitch is
installed and positioned.
Figure 55-9: Switch Attaching Screws on Bottom of Footswitch
UNLOAD SWITCH SCREWS LOAD SWITCH SCREWS FLOAT SWITCH SCREWS
COUCH GANTRY
4. Install the footswitch under the cable going between the couch and the gantry as shown in Figure 55‐
10 on page 689.
Figure 55-10: Installing the Multi‐Function Footswitch
5. Connect the cable going to the control board, two cables going to the couch, and 2 ground wires as
indicated in Figure 55‐11 on page 690.
6. Connect the cable(s) for the switch(es) that were replaced.
Figure 55-11: Disconnecting Multi‐Function Footswitch Cables for Removal
CONNECT CONNECT
GROUND WIRE 2 CABLES TO COUCH
CONNECT CABLE TO
CONNECT CONTROL BOARD
GROUND WIRE
7. Install the splash cover (diverter) on the footswitch as shown in Figure 55‐12 on page 691.
Figure 55-12: Splash Cover (Diverter)
8. Install the filler cover as shown in Figure 55‐13 on page 692 and attach it with 2 screws.

9. Correctly position the footswitch and while holding it in position pull the protective covering off of
the double‐sided tape. Press on the footswitch to firmly attach it to the floor.
10. Place the three actuator disks on the switches as shown in Figure 55‐13 on page 692.
Figure 55-13: Actuator Disk Placement on Footswitch

INSTALL FILLER INSTALL 3 ACTUATOR DISKS
COVER & 2 SCREWS
11. Place the three pedals on the switches and attach them with 3 screws as shown in Figure 55‐14 on

page 693. Note the pedal placement according to function symbols.
Figure 55-14: Pedal Placement on Footswitch
TABLE DOWN TABLE UP
INSTALL FILLER
COVER & 2 SCREWS TABLE OUT TABLE IN
UNLOAD LOAD FLOAT

PEDAL PEDAL PEDAL
12. Install the footswitch cover and secure with four screws (see Figure 55‐15).

13. Power up the system and test the footswitch operation. Test all the table controls on the gantry control
panels.
14. Test the system to verify that everything is functioning normally.
Figure 55-15: Footswitch Cover Screws
FOOTSWITCH COVER SCREWS

(2 ON OTHER SIDE ALSO)
Section 56
Section 56 Patient Monitoring Information System Components
Replacement
This procedure is for replacing the following Brilliance iCT Patient Information Monitoring Components:
• USB extender module
• Tapeswitch transition board
Time Required:
• USB extender module ‐ 1/2 hour
• Replace the tapeswitch transition board ‐ 1 hr.
Tools Needed:
• Standard FSE tool kit
• Set of inch hex keys including a 3/16” Hex key
56.1 System Preparation

!
CAUTION: Make sure to exercise proper static precautions according to the Anti-Static Field Service Kit
Instructions.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 56 Patient Monitoring
56.2 USB Extender Module Replacement

56.2.1 Removing the USB Extender Module
1. Remove the two screws attaching the right side J‐bracket cover to the carbon top assembly (see
Figure 56‐1).
Note: There are variations of these J‐bracket covers, but the procedure is similar for all types.
Figure 56-1: Carbon Top RH Side J‐bracket Cover Attaching Screws
2. Disconnect the cables from the USB extender module (see Figure 56‐2).
3. Remove the two screws from the USB extender module mounting bracket and remove the module
Figure 56-2: USB Extender Module

REMOVE 2 SCREWS AND REMOVE
MOUNTING BRACKET
56.2.2 Installing the USB Extender Module

1. Place the extender module in place and attach the mounting bracket with two screws
2. (see Figure 56‐2).
3. Connect the cables to the USB extender module (see Figure 56‐2).
4. Install the right side J‐bracket cover to the carbon top assembly and attach it with the two screws (see
Figure 56‐1).
56.3 Tapeswitch Transition Board Replacement

56.3.1 Removing the Tapeswitch Transition Board
1. Remove the rear and RH subframe covers according to the procedure “Brilliance Subframe RH, LH,
and Rear Covers Removal” on page 93.
2. Remove the two screws attaching the right side J‐bracket cover to the carbon top assembly (see
Figure 56‐3).
Note: There are variations of these J‐bracket covers, but the procedure is similar for all types.
Figure 56-3: Carbon Top RH Side J‐bracket Cover Attaching Screws
3. Remove the two transition board mounting bracket screws shown in Figure 56‐4 on page 701.
TRANSITION BOARD
MOUNTING BRACKET
SCREWS
TRANSITION BOARD
4. Disconnect the ground wire from the terminal as shown in Figure 56‐5 on page 702.

5. Remove the nuts securing the cable clamp, e‐chain, and the transition board to the bracket shown in
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors shown in Figure 56‐5 on page 702 from the transition board.
Figure 56-5: Disconnecting and Removing Old Transition Board

REMOVE NUTS DISCONNECT CONNECTORS
DISCONNECT WIRE
7. Remove the two Tape Switch Transition Board mounting screws on the bottom of the circuit board
shown in
Figure 56‐6 on page 703 and remove the bracket.
TRANSITION BOARD
MOUNTING SCREWS
TAPE SWITCH
TRANSITION BOARD
56.3.2 Installing the Tapeswitch Transition Board

1. Place the two spacers (removed previously) between the e‐chain and the bracket as shown in
Figure 56‐8 on page 705 and attach the new transition board, e‐chain, and the cable clamp to the
mounting bracket with 2 screws and 2 nuts as shown.
Figure 56-7: Transition Board Mounted to Bracket

SPACERS
2. Connect the connector from the e‐chain to the transition board connector as shown in Figure 56‐8 on
page 705.
3. Connect the USB cable as shown in Figure 56‐8 on page 705.
4. Connect the ground wires to the terminals as shown in Figure 56‐8 on page 705.
Figure 56-8: Installing and Connecting New Transition Board

INSTALL NUTS CONNECT CONNECTORS
CONNECT WIRE
5. Attach the transition board mounting bracket to the table frame with 2 screws as shown in Figure 56‐
9 on page 706.
Note: Make sure that the PE9 ground wire is not obstructing the mounting bracket.
6. Temporarily install the RH subframe cover and adjust the position of the transition board as
necessary so that it does not contact the cover.
7. Install the RH and rear subframe covers according to the procedure “Subframe RH, LH, and Rear
Covers Installation” on page 107.
8. Install the RH J‐bracket cover (see Figure 56‐3).
9. Power up the system and check that the system is operating properly and that the tape switches and
PIM function properly.
TRANSITION BOARD
BRACKET MOUNTING
SCREWS
CHECK THAT TRANSITION

BOARD DOES NOT TOUCH
THE COVER
Section 57
Section 57 Checking Horizontal Drive Belt Tension
This section contains specific settings for checking the patient support horizontal drive belt tension using
the Gates Sonic Tension Meter model 505C. For complete meter instructions and precautions, refer to the
Sonic Tension Meter Manual that is supplied with the meter.
57.1 Meter Setup

1. Install the optional flexible sensor (see Figure 57‐1) to the handheld meter by aligning the key in
between the connector halves and pushing the transducer onto the meter connector. DO NOT USE
EXCESSIVE FORCE.
Figure 57-1: Optional Flexible Sensor
1. O i l Fl ibl S
Set the meter to measure in pounds‐force (lbf) as follows:
a) With the unit powered off, press the “0” and “9” and “Power” buttons down at the same time.
b) Momentarily press the “Select” button (see Figure 57-2 on page 708) the required number of times
until lbf appears on the display.
c) Press the “Power” button again to return the meter to its normal operating mode.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Section 57 Checking Horizontal
2. If the meter is not already on, turn ON the meter by pressing the POWER button.
The LCD screen displays the current input data storage register number (see Figure 57‐2 on page 708).
Figure 57-2: Sonic Tension Meter.
POWER ON/OFF MEASURE

BUTTON BUTTON
WEGHT BUTTON
SPAN BUTTON
Hz BUTTON
WIDTH BUTTON
RED SELECT BUTTON

INDICATOR
GREEN INDICATOR
3. Select Program Register number 1 by repeatedly pressing the SELECT button on the keypad (see
Figure 57‐2 on page 708), as required until no 1. is displayed (see Figure 57‐2 on page 708).
Figure 57-3: Program Number 1 Selected
4. Press the WEIGHT button.
5. Use the number buttons to enter 0084 for the belt weight value of 0084 g/m (grams per meter).
6. Press the WIDTH button.
7. Use the number buttons to enter 0080 for the belt width of 008.0 mm/#R.
8. Press the SPAN button.
9. Use the number buttons to enter 0180 for a span value of 0180 mm.
10. Reset the meter by quickly pressing and releasing the POWER button.
57.2 Checking the Belt Tension

1. Press the POWER button to turn the meter on.
The LCD screen displays the current input data storage register number.
2. Make sure that data storage register no. 1 that was set up is displayed (see Figure 57‐2 on page 708).
If no. 1 is not displayed, select it by repeatedly pressing the SELECT button on the keypad until no. 1
is displayed.
3. Press the Hz button once.
A small T should be displayed on the left edge of the display and units lbf (pounds‐force) as shown
in Figure 57‐4 on page 710. If the correct units are not displayed, press the Hz button once to toggle to
tension display.
Figure 57-4: Meter Set for Correct Units
LETTER T lbf UNITS
4. Position the pickup probe within 1 inch of the belt as shown in Figure 57‐5 on page 711.
Figure 57-5: Measuring Belt Tension
5. Start the measurement by pressing and releasing the MEASURE button.
The green LED will blink and the display will flash during the measurement.
6. While holding the probe within 1 inch of the belt as shown in Figure 57‐5 on page 711, “strum” the
belt like one would strum a guitar string to cause it to vibrate.
The meter will indicate measurement is complete by sounding a tone and displaying the tension
value.
Note: The red LED will illuminate if the tension cannot be measured.
If the message ERR is displayed, the measurement was unsuccessful. Attempt repeated
measurements by slightly changing transducer distance or angle to belt.
Note: The meter will continue to measure until the SELECT button is pressed to stop measuring. When the SELECT
button is pressed, the green LED will extinguish, and no.1 will be displayed.
7. Take a few readings to make sure the readings are representative and repeatable.
For used belts, the tension should be 40 to 50 lbf.
For new belts, the tension should be set to 70 to 80 lbf because they will stretch some during early
use.
8. If needed, adjust the belt tension according to the applicable procedure and recheck the tension.
Repeat adjusting and checking until the tension is correct.
• For belt adjustment on standard patient supports refer to “Standard Horizontal Drive Belt Removal /
Replacement Procedure” on page 356.
• For belt adjustment on bariatric patient supports refer to “Bariatric & Extended Horizontal Drive Belt
Replacement Procedure” on page 361.
9. When finished measuring, turn the meter OFF by press and holding the POWER button.
Section 58
Section 58 Replacement of an Entire Patient Support
For replacement of an entire patient support, refer to the applicable Brilliance Patient Support Installation
Manual.
Appendix A
Appendix A Patient Support Subframe Quick Release
A.1 Releasing the Patient Support Subframe Quick

Release
1. Make sure the patient support top is as far away from the gantry as it will go.
2. Unscrew the wingnut or nylock nut on the subframe quick release located under the front of the
patient support (see Figure A‐1 on page 716).
a. Unscrew the wing nut or nylock nut enough so that the cross‐pin will drop down from the lock
pad it engages.
b. Patient supports that have the stationary threaded rod quick release will require the nut to be fully
removed.
3. Move the patient support subframe away from the gantry. Note that it may take considerable force to
move the subframe out of its normal position. Do not use the floating top as a mechanism to break the
initial resistance. However, after the initial resistance is overcome, the patient support subframe
should move freely.
Brilliance CT 6/10/16/16P/40/64, Big Bore and iCT ‐ MX8000 Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement Appendix A Patient Support
A.2 Engaging the Patient Support Subframe Quick

Release
1. Move the patient support MAX IN toward the gantry.
2. Verify the patient support is raised to access the top subframe quick release.
3. For the Wing Nut / Nylock Nut type quick release, re‐engage the patient support quick release:
a. Verify the top subframe is moved all the way toward the gantry.
b. Push the T‐mechanism (cross‐pin) of the quick release up until it goes into the slot of the subframe
bracket (see Figure A‐2 on page 718).
c. Tighten the Wing Nut / Nylock Nut on the subframe quick release located at the front of the patient
support (see Figure A‐1 on page 716). The nylock nut is torqued to 23 ft‐lbs (31.2 N/m).
4. For the stationary threaded rod type quick release, re‐engage the patient support quick release:
a. Move the top subframe all the way toward the gantry. The threaded rod will protrude through the
block.
b. Install the nut and torque it to a value of 23 ft‐lbs (31.2 N/m) (see Figure A‐1 on page 716).
Figure A-1: Patient Support Subframe Quick Release
Wing Nut Release
Patient Support Latch Overall Nylock Nut Release
Subframe Support Disengaged
Threaded Rod / Nut Release
A.3 Testing Patient Support Subframe Quick Release

1. Tighten nut (wing nut, nylock nut or locking flange nut on stationary threaded rod) on the quick
release.
2. Verify the subframe is secure:
a. For patient supports with the stationary threaded rod, the nut is torqued to 23 ft‐lbs (31.2 N/m).
Note: The correct engagement is with the threaded element protruding through the nut.
b. For patient supports with a nylock nut:
i. Inspect and make sure the threaded end of the T‐mechanism (cross‐pin) is secured behind the
slotted locking member (see Figure A‐2 on page 718).
ii. The nut is torqued to 23 ft‐lbs (31.2 N/m).
c. For patient supports with a wing nut:
i. Inspect the threaded end of the T‐mechanism (cross‐pin) and make sure it is secured behind
the slotted locking member (see Figure A‐2 on page 718).
3. If wing nut version, continue to Step 4 on page 717 to test the quick release. If nylock nut or stationary
threaded rod version, procedure is complete.
4. Test the patient support subframe quick release engagement (applicable for the wingnut version,
only):
a. With power applied to the patient support (i.e. horizontal drive enabled) and the carbon top
extended into the bore, engage the tape switch to put carbon top into float mode.
b. While in float mode, using the tape switch handle, move (retract) the carbon top as one would do
in operation.
c. After about 30cm maximum of travel and while the carbon top is still in motion, release the tape
switch, causing the carbon top to abruptly stop.
5. Check the subframe for security.
a. The subframe should not be disconnected. Visually recheck the latch to confirm that the step from
2b(i) or 2c(i) is secure (see Figure A‐2, below.)
Figure A-2: Cross Pin Engaged and Secured Behind the Block
Lock Pad
Block
Cross Pin
Slotted Member (T-Mechanism)
Cross Pin Engaged

Cross Pin Assembly, Disengaged
Slotted Locking Member
Cross Pin
(T-Mechanism)
Cross Pin Disengaged
b. Verify the subframe is still engaged by visually checking the alignment of the subframe to the
lower subframe (see Figure A‐3, below.)
Figure A-3: Subframe Patient Support Cover Alignment: Engaged versus Disengaged
Subframe Subframe
(MAX IN)
Subframe Patient Support Disengaged, Subframe Patient Support Engaged,

with Covers Misaligned with Covers Aligned
c. Repeat Step 4 on page 717 through Step 5 on page 718 above and repair as needed, if the subframe
is moving relative to the base assembly.
d. Success Criteria: Complete Step 4 on page 717 through Step 5 on page 718 twice in a row, with no
disengagement or repair.

Brilliance CT 6-64, Big Bore, iCT & Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brilliance CT 6-64, Big Bore, iCT & Dual v.EXP Patient Support Repair and Replacement PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brilliance CT 6/10/16/

16P/40/64, Big Bore and

Repair and Replacement Manual

4598 007 86121

© 2015 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved. CSIP Level 1

Safety and Legal Information

Installation and Environment

Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Mechanical-electrical Warning

Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Radiation Warning

ECO Revision Date Comments

Section 1 Safety Guidelines: ............................................................................. 19

Section 4 Brilliance iCT Gantry Power Down / Power Up: ................................... 48

Section 6 Replacing Sub-frame Service Lock: .................................................... 61

Section 8 1Patient Support Covers Removal / Replacement: .............................. 92

Section 9 Power Panel Removal / Replacement Procedure : ............................... 135

Section 10 Power Supply Removal / Replacement Procedure: ........................... 139

Section 11 Inverter Panel Removal / Replacement Procedure : .......................... 141

Section 12 Vertical Motor Inverter Module Replacement: .................................. 156

12.2 Installing the Inverter ............................................................................................ 163

Section 13 Couch Control Board Removal / Replacement Procedure : ................. 168

Section 14 Couch CPM Board Removal / Replacement Procedure : ...................... 171

Section 15 ACS Controller Removal / Replacement Procedure: .......................... 176

Section 16 AMC Horizontal Motor Controller Replacement Procedure: ................ 180

Section 17 Footswitch Tape Switches Removal / Replacement Procedure : ......... 185

18.3 Installing the Vertical Drive Motor ............................................................................ 199

Section 19 Vertical Brake Removal / Replacement: ........................................... 210

Section 21 Vertical Encoder Assembly Removal / Replacement Procedure : ........ 233

Section 22 Vertical Transducer Removal / Replacement Procedure : ................... 240

Section 23 Vertical Monitor Board Removal / Replacement Procedure: .............. 244

Section 24 Vertical Up/Down Limit Switches Removal / Replacement Procedure : 247

24.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 248

Section 26 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Replacement -

Section 27 Vertical Drive Ball Screw Bearing Retainer

28.2 Installation ........................................................................................................... 342

Section 30 Standard Horizontal Drive Belt Removal / Replacement Procedure : .. 356

Section 32 Standard Horizontal Brake Replacement Procedure : ......................... 367

Section 34 Standard Horizontal Drive Clutch Replacement Procedure : ............... 382

35.1 Belt Removal ........................................................................................................ 389

Section 37 Std Horizontal Relative Position Encoder Replacement: .................... 415

Section 39 Extended Support Absolute & Relative Position Encoders

40.1 Drive Nut Removal................................................................................................. 450

Section 41 Standard Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure: 465

Section 43 Bariatric Horizontal Drive Screw Removal / Replacement Procedure : 506

44.1 Drive Nut Removal................................................................................................. 531

Section 45 Extended Support Horizontal Drive Screw Replacement Procedure : .. 557

Section 46 Horizontal Bearing Removal / Replacement Procedure: .................... 604

Section 47 Top Horizontal Force Adjustment Procedure: ................................... 613

Section 48 Top Bearing Block Removal / Replacement Procedure: ..................... 622

48.2 Bearing Block Removal ........................................................................................... 632

Section 49 Bariatric Gas Spring Removal / Replacement Procedure : .................. 638

Section 52 Dual-v.EXP Carbon Top Replacement: .............................................. 661

Section 53 Horizontal In/Out Limit Switches Removal / Replacement Procedure: 672

Section 54 Brilliance Horizontal Tape Switches Replacement: ........................... 674

Section 55 Multi-Function Footswitch & Parts Replacement:.............................. 678

55.1 Removing the Footswitch ........................................................................................ 681

Section 56 Patient Monitoring Information System Components Replacement: ... 695

Section 57 Checking Horizontal Drive Belt Tension: .......................................... 707

Section 58 Replacement of an Entire Patient Support: ...................................... 713

Appendix A Patient Support Subframe Quick Release: ....................................... 714

1.1 General Precautions

1.1.1 Remote Services

1.1.2 Explanation of Symbols

1.1.3 Servicing Electro-medical Systems and Equipment